JP2018153328A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines , such as pachinko machines , shift to a winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening is successful. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making the game value that can be acquired different .

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, with the conventional gaming machine described above, it may be difficult to improve the interest in the game .

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the privilege ball entering means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering, and the game ball entering the privilege ball entering means. Variable means for varying between a first position where the ball is possible and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, The discriminating information for use in discriminating the discriminating means is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means is a predetermined specific information. Discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for the discrimination of the discrimination means with the number being the upper limit, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and its dynamic display. Table of identification information by means And a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period, and a first determination result based on the determination result of the determination means being a predetermined first determination result. First variable control means for controlling the variable mode of the variable means to be the first variable mode from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the time when a new determination can be executed by the determination means. Based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result different from the first determination result, the game state at the time when the determination corresponding to the second determination result is executed. Is based on that the game state setting means capable of setting different game states and the determination result of the determining means are the second determination result, and at least the specific variable which is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode. Aspects include In a second variable mode, the second variable control means for controlling the variable means and the discrimination information corresponding to the specific number of the first discrimination results are stored in the discrimination information storage means. In the situation, after the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first of the determination information of the specific number of the determination information is started, to the last of the determination information of the specific number of the determination information A variable aspect of the variable means until a corresponding determination result is shown, and a means for making it difficult to distinguish the variable aspect from a part of the second variable aspect, and the identification information storage means stores the identification information. When the determination information is stored, the determination information is used for the determination of the determination means by an effect that can suggest to the player that the determination result may be the first determination result by using the stored determination information. Real before used It is configured to run .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a privilege entering means for giving a predetermined benefit based on the entry of the game ball, and the game ball can enter the privilege entering means. Variable means for changing the position to one position and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, a determining means for performing determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the determination of the determining means. Discrimination information for use in, discrimination information acquisition means to acquire based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, with a predetermined specific number as an upper limit, Discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the identification information by the dynamic display means. Dynamic display in the dynamic display of The dynamic display period determining means for determining the interval, and the identification information for indicating the first determination result based on the determination result of the determining means being the predetermined first determination result. First variable control means for controlling the variable mode of the variable means to be the first variable mode from the start of the dynamic display to the time when a new determination can be performed by the determination means; A game state different from the game state at the time when the determination corresponding to the second determination result is executed based on the determination result of the means being the second determination result different from the first determination result. Based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the second discrimination result, at least a specific variable aspect that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable aspect is included. Second variable mode A second variable control means for controlling the variable means, and the determination information storing means stores the determination information corresponding to the specific number of the first determination results. From the start of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first of the determination information among the number of the determination information, the determination result corresponding to the last of the determination information of the specific number of the determination information is displayed. And a means for making it difficult to distinguish the variable mode of the variable means from a part of the second variable mode until the determination information is stored in the determination information storage means. Before the discrimination information is used for the discrimination of the discrimination means, an effect capable of suggesting to the player the possibility of the first discrimination result by the discrimination using the stored discrimination information is provided. Configured to be executable There is.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. 5A is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line La-La of FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb of FIG. 5C. Yes, (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. (A) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path, and (b) is a flow path solenoid inoperative, FIG. 6 is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the guide piece of the switching member closes the opening surface of the entrance of the discharge passage. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3 symbol display device in 1st Embodiment, (b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the big hit displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is the entrance to the 2nd entrance mouth during the big hit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when is detected. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the door breakthrough mode production performed with the start of the ending period after completion of all the rounds of the big hit in the first embodiment, and (b). [Fig. 6] is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first door is broken through in the door breakthrough mode effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when failing to break through the fourth door in the door breakthrough mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of successfully breaking through all the doors in the door breakthrough mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the correspondence of the display mode and the state of a specific winning opening in the case of shifting to the probability variation mode, and (b) is the second holding ball of the second special symbol. Is a big hit F, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a display mode and a state of a specific winning opening when shifting to the normal mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation contents typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation contents of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a main control in a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the per-figure table. FIG. 4C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the special figure 1 deviating (normal) table, and (d) is a diagram of the special figure 1 deviating (probable) table. It is the figure which showed the content typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the special figure 2 jackpot (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (b) is the regulation content of the special figure 2 jackpot (5 fluctuations or more) table. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (d) is a special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more). ) Is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the table. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the state transfer method in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning a prize processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a small hit middle winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information command processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows closing command processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ending command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end time process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the several command process. 6 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flow chart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 8 is a flowchart showing error command processing according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main controller in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is the main controller in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the state transfer method in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows closing state discriminating processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the breakthrough mode selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a protruding state (a state in which three balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve) in the modified example of the second embodiment. Yes, (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a buried state in the modification of the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  On the inner frame 12, a large number of nails, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like are detachably attached from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, in the case of changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Also, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails and windmills for guiding a ball, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize hole. The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the distribution member 660, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a starting opening or the like is provided and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the game balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down before they pass through the outlet 66 and the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entrance. When 67 is passed, the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol which is performed for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 7 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of special symbols, 6 types of "bonus A" to "bonus F" are provided, and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the jackpot ends, in accordance with the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The three types of “big hits A to C” are the big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is achieved in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64. The three types of “big hits D to F” are the big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of the description, the lottery of the special symbol that is executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the lottery of the first special symbol, and the ball is the second prize. The lottery for the special symbol that is executed upon entering the ball entrance 640 is called the lottery for the second special symbol.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the lottery for ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball in the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal symbol hits, the first ball entrance 64 is changed by changing the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). It will be released. Note that, in the normal state, the electric accessory 64a is disposed at the closed position, so that the right side and the left side of the first entrance 64 in front view are closed. Therefore, the balls rolling from the right side and the left side in the front view toward the first ball entrance 64 cannot enter the first ball entrance 64 due to being blocked by the electric accessory 64a (difficulty. ). For this reason, basically, only the ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side in the front view to the first ball entrance 64 can enter the first ball entrance 64 basically. On the other hand, when the normal symbol is hit, the ball that has rolled from the right and left in front view toward the first entrance 64 is opened by opening the electric accessory 64a. It becomes easier to enter the ball, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided.

When the "big hit A" and the "big hit D" are reached, the number of rounds becomes 16 rounds in the special gaming state (16 round big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 round big hit), when it becomes "big hit C", it becomes a special game state of 2 rounds, when it becomes "big hit E", When the number of rounds is a special game state of 7 rounds (7 round jackpot), and when the "big hit F" is reached, the number of rounds is 6 rounds of special game state (6 round jackpot). Furthermore, if the specific conditions are satisfied during each of the above jackpot games (the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 has passed a probability change switch 65e3 described later), the high probability state of the special symbol (special (Probably changing the pattern). Also, if a high probability state of special symbols is given,
The probability of hitting a normal symbol is also increased (a time saving state of a normal symbol is given). The high probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol continue after the big hit ends until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball did not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the special symbol has a low probability state until the next jackpot, and the normal symbol hits. Probability will also be a normal probability (becomes a normal state of normal symbols).

  Here, "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is up, so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probably changed state of the special symbol), in other words, a special game state It is a game state where it is easy to move to (big hit). On the other hand, if it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol" (high probability state of the ordinary symbol) refers to a gaming state in which the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol" (low probability state of ordinary symbol). Indicates that the winning probability is low.

  After that, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot of the special symbol is called a probability variation period of the special symbol. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is called the time saving period of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is changed according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the "probably changed state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol" given after the jackpot are configured to continue until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "probability change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" may be configured to be limited until the number of times the lottery for the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of times of lottery, which is the "probably changed state of the special symbol", and the number of times of lottery, which is the "time saving state of the normal symbol" may be different. Further, the number of times of lottery may be varied according to the type of jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power source or the like, the "special symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol normal state" are always set. Then, it becomes a big hit, and when the sphere passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, while shifting from the "low probability state of the special symbol" to the "probability variation state of the special symbol", from the "normal state of the normal symbol" Transition to "normal time saving state". In this case, the "probably changed state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" that have been set are continued until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the ball has not passed the probability variation switch 65e3 even once in the big hit of 1, the state shifts to "low probability state of special symbol" and "normal state of normal symbol". In addition, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when the “big hit A to D”, the ball easily passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, and when the “big hit E, F” occurs, the big hit becomes It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. When the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, one of the "big hits A to C", it is highly likely that after the jackpot is "probably changed state of the special symbol" and "time saving state of the normal symbol". On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is one of the “jackpots D to F”. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the proportion of the “jackpot D” is 5%. Therefore, when the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the "big hit E, F" with a high probability (95% ratio), so after the end of the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player "low probability state of the special symbol" And there is a high possibility that it will be in the "normal state of normal patterns". Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is more disadvantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the big hits A to F). (First pattern) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. To be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 7B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by imitating the numbers "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is gathered is performed, and The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 4/5 on the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The lower ⅕ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls, the advance notice character, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (0.5 seconds or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is It is possible to suppress oversight of whether or not it is a jackpot. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is the combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is the reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. Furthermore, when there are both a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is given priority. To be executed.

  On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to shoot a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), but there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, it corresponds to the new ball. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is a sphere that has not been changed among the spheres entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The number of holding balls, which is the number of (holding balls), is displayed by the number of holding symbols indicating each holding ball.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right side and the left side as viewed from the front. The holding symbol displayed on the right side in front view is a holding symbol (first holding symbol) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol, and the holding symbol displayed on the right side in front view corresponds to the lottery for the second special symbol. It is a reserved symbol (second reserved symbol) to be. FIG. 7 (b) exemplifies a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed and zero second retained symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank). There is.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of holding balls by the number of holding symbols, the number of holding balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of holding balls only. You may make it display in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed along with the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, is being performed, and is changed. As the stopped symbol after the end, the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the sphere passes through either of the left and right normal ball entrances 67, a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a normal symbol (second symbol) A variable display is displayed in which the pattern and the pattern are alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball easily enters the second ball inlet 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed by lighting in the second symbol suspension lamp 84. . Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times, as in the case of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, but 3 times or less, or It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. The first ball entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 64a that can be opened and closed on the left and right respectively. When the electric accessory 64a is in an open state, the first ball entrance 64 is vertically above the first entrance 64. In addition to the spheres that have flowed down from, it is possible to enter spheres that have flowed down from the left and right. It should be noted that this first ball inlet 64 is a ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (a ball that has been hit left) regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is open. The nails and the like are arranged so that it is easier for the ball to enter than the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the ball that has been hit to the right).

  A second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is arranged on the upper right side in front view with respect to the first ball entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second ball inlet 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, the sphere that basically flows down the flow path provided to the right of the variable display device unit 80. However, it is easier to enter the ball than the sphere flowing down the flow path provided to the left of the variable display device unit 80.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 7 balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The specific winning opening 65a and the second winning opening 640 are positions where a ball (right-handed ball) flowing down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 can enter (easy to enter). It is located in. In other words, the sphere that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position where it cannot enter (is difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of the prize ball (get a profit) during the jackpot, the player may hit the ball to the right.

  Inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which balls can pass are provided (see FIGS. 6A and 6B). The sphere that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol is given after the big hit by passing the ball. This special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the big hit. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a ball can be easily inserted into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a maximum of 30 seconds). (Big hits A to D) and big hits (big hits E, F) that make it difficult to put the ball into the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for only 0.2 seconds at maximum) are provided. .

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning a prize device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b which is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, so that the variable winning device 65 is formed. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for turning on the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. There is provided an LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back surface side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body. A switching member 65h projecting into the flow path formed by 5g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, and a back surface arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and actuating the link member 65i, and the flow path solenoid 65k are covered from the back surface side and fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning a prize device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 5B. The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game sphere that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the opened state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is open, the plane orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently used for the specific winning opening. You can win in 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. It The game sphere that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is provided with a special discharge flow path 65e2 and that is made up of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is discharged.

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, so that the gaming state after the big hit game is the certain variation state of the special symbol ( Probability variation game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Also, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the big hit, and at the same time as the start of the first round of the big hit, the switching member 65h is operated to a position where the special discharge flow passage 65e2 is opened, while the big hit. Simultaneously with the end of the first round, the switching member 65h is operated to the position where the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed. Further, the time required to pass through the opening of the variable winning a prize device 65 and the entrance of the special discharge passage 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 0.2 seconds. There is. As described above, in the jackpots E and F, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds at maximum, so as long as the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and the ball cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time. The special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the balls flow into the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the big hits E and F occur, it becomes difficult for the sphere to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit of 1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge passage 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 65e2.

  The game sphere guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge passage 65e1, a ball discharge switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, whether all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the total of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be found early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (11 for 1 ball prize in the present embodiment). Individual prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the variable winning a prize device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A substantially semicircular distribution member 660 is provided on the upper right side in front view of the variable winning device 65. The distribution member 660 is provided with receiving portions on its left and right sides capable of receiving balls that have flowed down from above. The distribution member 660 has a configuration in which the right side receiving portion is located directly below the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 and a configuration in which the left side receiving portion is located directly below the flow path. Can be arranged in the street. FIG. 2 exemplifies an arrangement in which the right side receiving portion is directly below the flow path.

  In a state where the right side receiving portion is located directly below the flow path, when the sphere flowing down the flow path is received by the right side receiving portion, the distribution member 660 is caused by the weight of the sphere. As a result of the rotation in the clockwise direction, the left-hand side receiving portion is arranged directly below the flow path. In addition, since the right-side receiving portion is tilted in the lower right direction in front view due to the rotation, the sphere rolls along the tilt, and as a result, flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 660. The sphere that flows down to the lower right of the distribution member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a.

  In a state where the left-hand side receiving portion is located directly below the flow path, when the sphere flowing down the flow passage is received by the left-hand side receiving portion, the distribution member 660 is As a result of the rotation in the counterclockwise direction, the right-side receiving portion is arranged immediately below the flow path. Further, since the receiving portion on the left side is tilted in the lower left direction in front view due to the rotation, the sphere rolls along the tilt, and as a result, the sorting member 660 flows downward in the lower left direction. The sphere that flows down to the lower left of the distribution member 660 flows down along the flow path toward the second entrance 640, and about 80% of the sphere enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the sphere that is struck into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the sphere that is struck right) is directed by the distribution member 660 to the direction of the variable winning device 65. And the direction of the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit), when the player hits right to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a and wins the winning ball, the ball goes to the second winning opening 640 during the big hit. Enter a lot of balls. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the value (4) at the end of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type (big hit E, F) in which the ball is hard to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. In addition, the jackpots E and F are both extremely short in opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in each round (0.2 seconds), and it is difficult to put a ball into the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, with a high probability (95%), the prize ball can hardly be obtained, and the gaming state after the jackpot is also a disadvantageous jackpot type. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is an unfavorable lottery, and it is possible to make the player want to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol as much as possible.

  However, as described above, when a right hit is made in order to win a ball to the specific winning opening 65a and win a prize ball in the jackpot, the ball also enters the second winning opening 640, so at least the jackpot After the end, the lottery of the second special symbol held in the big hit is executed. Therefore, after the jackpot, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is performed in the hope that the jackpot will not be a jackpot in the special symbol lottery until there are no reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol. As expected by the player, if all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery for the second special symbol are out of place, it is possible to make only the lottery for the first special symbol by left-handing, so the player It is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held until a big jackpot (big jackpot A to C) of a relatively advantageous type is obtained.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize ball is awarded. When the ball is hit to the right, one of the two balls is distributed to the second entrance 640 by the distribution member 660, so that all the balls distributed to the second entrance 640 are second. Even if the ball enters the ball entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by the right hit is paid out by the prize ball. Therefore, when the player hits the ball to the right, the number of balls to be held tends to decrease, so that it is possible to eliminate the advantage of performing the ball to the right. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits the ball to the right in normal times (states other than jackpot).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot is over, it becomes disadvantageous to the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are removed. If so, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the predetermined number (4 times) of the lottery results after the jackpot is over, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, which are executed in the main display area Dm, will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player hits right at the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit, the second special symbol is completed by the end of the big hit by the ball entering the second entrance 640. Is configured to reach the maximum number of reserve balls. When the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, it is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, while the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is being performed, the player hopes that the lottery will be missed. In the first embodiment, whether or not the lottery result which is a jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the reserved balls until all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. It is configured to execute a performance that suggests.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B, an effect executed during a big hit will be described. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 8A, during the jackpot, the effect that the adventurer 811 searches for the cave is displayed. Further, on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR1 is displayed. The current round number is displayed in the display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 8A, the character "1 round" is displayed, indicating that the current round is the 1st round.

  On the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR2 is displayed. In the display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entrance into the specific winning opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8A, the character “GET 0022” is displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, 2 balls have been identified since the jackpot was started). It has shown that it entered the winning opening 65a).

  Further, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. Although the details will be described later, the four display areas HR3a to HR3d show the expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol increased by the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit. The image is displayed. As described above, it is more likely that the second special symbol will be missed in the lottery than the jackpot, so the display areas HR3a to HR3d will be missed. An image showing the degree of expectation is displayed.

  In addition, FIG. 8A illustrates a state in which there is no holding ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is provided with a symbol "?". The image is displayed.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during a big hit. As shown in FIG. 8B, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected during the big hit, the effect that the adventurer 811 discovers the treasure box 812 is executed. This treasure box contains the key 813, and the mode of the key 813 suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol held based on the entry will be out. The more luxurious the mode of the key 813, the higher the degree of expectation of disengagement, and the poorer the mode, the lower the degree of expectation of disengagement (the higher the risk of winning in the lottery for the second special symbol).

  FIG. 8B illustrates a case where the key 813 in the normal mode is displayed. When the effect that the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813 is performed, the key of the same aspect as the discovered aspect is displayed above the display area in which “?” Is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. The areas are displayed in order. In the example of FIG. 8B, the case where the image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a in the display area in which the symbol “?” Is displayed is illustrated. In this way, by displaying the mode of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, the variable display based on each hold ball executed after the end of this big hit. The player can check the expectation level of at any timing. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the main display area Dm is provided with the dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the expectation of the reserved ball of the second special symbol, but the dedicated display is not always required. There is no need to provide a region. For example, the reserved symbol of the second special symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds may be displayed in the form of the key discovered by the adventurer 811.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the ending effect after the completion of all the rounds of the jackpot. In the present first embodiment, from the ending period of the jackpot, until the variation time of all the variable display based on the holding ball of the second special symbol elapses, jackpot E in the holding ball of the second special symbol, An effect is executed to inform the player whether or not F exists. That is, even after all the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is finished, it is suggested whether or not the gaming state is still the "probably changed state of the special symbol", and the "time saving state of the normal symbol". The effect for is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the description, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, "a special variation state of the special symbol", and "a time saving state of a normal symbol" is referred to as a "probability variation mode", which is disadvantageous to the player. It is a game state, "low probability state of special symbol", and "normal state of normal symbol" is called "normal mode".

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot ending period is started, an adventurer 811 discovers the door 814. Further, a display region HR4 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is formed above the image of the door 814. In this display area HR4, the characters "start door mode !! Break through four doors !!" are displayed. With these display contents, if it is possible to open the four doors by using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the jackpot, it becomes advantageous for the player (holding ball of the second special symbol). The probability variation mode continues even after the digestion of)) can be easily understood by the player. Further, in the display area HR1 on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of a left-pointing arrow and the character "left hit" are displayed. With these displays, it is possible to cause the player to hit the ball to the left (to hit the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  In addition, it is configured to notify the left-handed hit with the start of the ending period, in order to suppress the lottery of the second special symbol is executed after the end of the jackpot. That is, during the ending period, the ball that is shot by the player making a right hit is the second ball entrance 640 after the jackpot is over (and after the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started). It is prevented that the number of times the lottery for the second special symbol after the jackpot ends is increased (the lottery for the second special symbol is executed beyond the four times held during the jackpot). This is to (suppress). As described above, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the prize balls cannot be almost obtained during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the greater the number of times the second special symbol is drawn, the more disadvantageous the player is. For this reason, in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit the right side after the jackpot and the ball newly enters the second entrance 640, in the first embodiment, the game is started from the ending period. It is configured to notify the person of left-handedness. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot can be limited to the one by the holding ball of the second special symbol that was held during the jackpot, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  When the jackpot (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, as shown in FIG. 9B, an effect of breaking through the door 614 using the keys collected during the jackpot is executed. FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 uses the key displayed in the display area HR3a and succeeds in breaking through the door 814. When the breakthrough is successful, an image in which the door 614 is opened is displayed, and the characters “breakthrough !!” are displayed in the display area HR4. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the player breaks through the remaining three doors, the player will be in an advantageous state (the probability change mode will be entered).

  The effect of breaking through the door 614 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect that the adventurer 811 uses the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) to open (break through) the first door is based on the first holding ball of the second special symbol. This is executed in a period from the start of the variable display to the start of the variable display based on the second holding ball. Similarly, the adventurer 811 uses the second key to open the second door, and the third variable is displayed after the variable display based on the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is started. It is executed during the period until the variable display based on the reserved balls is started. The effect that the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is the 4th hold ball after the variable display based on the 3rd hold ball of the 2nd special symbol is started. It is executed in the period until the variable display based on the above is started. The effect of opening the fourth door by using the fourth key is executed in the variable time of the variable display based on the fourth holding ball of the second special symbol. In addition, these are operation | movement when the reserve ball of a 2nd special symbol is a lottery result corresponding to a miss, and when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of a 2nd special symbol, it breaks through a door during the period of the said big hit. The production is performed once or a plurality of times.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to detect from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit. As described above, when the second special symbol is removed, the removal (so-called small hit) that is accompanied by the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined. Then, the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the case of a small hit, and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 of each round in the case of a big hit E or F in the lottery of the second special symbol. Match. Furthermore, when the jackpots E and F are made, the interval period between the rounds is made to coincide with the variation time (1 second) when the second special symbol is missed in the lottery. With this configuration, even if the jackpot E or the jackpot F occurs during execution of the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the present is already a jackpot from the opening period and the opening interval of the opening / closing door 65f1. It can be difficult to determine whether or not As a result, a series of effects (door breakthrough mode effects) executed at the start of the ending period can be made to pay attention to the end.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when failing to break through the fourth door in the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when one of the big hits E and F is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the word “Failure ...” is displayed in the display area HR4 and the adventurer 811 owns it. The production of breaking the key is executed. By these display modes, the player can easily understand that the probability variation mode has ended (the big hit E or F has been won).

  FIG.10 (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of succeeding in breaching through the 4th door in door breakthrough mode production. In this case, the image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and the characters "Great success !!" and "Probability change mode entry !!" are displayed in the display area HR4. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that the player can play the game in the advantageous probability variation mode.

  In this way, in the first embodiment, from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol increased during the jackpot, the above-mentioned door breakthrough is performed. It is configured to execute a mode effect. Due to this door breakthrough mode effect, all variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol will be removed, and whether the game can be played in the probability variation mode, the jackpots E and F are included in the retention balls, and in the probability variation mode. It is possible to suggest to the player whether or not the player falls into the normal mode without performing the lottery for the first special symbol. By having a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, depending on whether or not the number of doors corresponding to the number of holding balls of the second special symbol can be broken through, the game after all the variable displays based on the holding balls of the second special symbol are finished. Although it has been configured to notify whether or not the state is the probability change mode, the presentation mode is not limited to this. Finally, any one of the two types of results (success or failure, victory, defeat, confirmation, deviation, etc.) may be reported, and for example, the adventurer 811 may be an enemy. The configuration may be such that the probability change mode is notified if the enemy fights and wins.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between a change over time in the effect mode during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and a change over time in the state of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing state of the opening / closing door 65f1). FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the probability variation mode is notified (that is, in the case of the lottery result in which all the reserved balls of the second special symbol correspond to the removal). On the other hand, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship when the normal mode is notified (that is, when the jackpot E or F is included in the hold).

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when it is informed that the mode has changed to the probability variation mode (when the lottery for the second special symbol is all out), the ending screen is started and the start screen of the door breakthrough mode effect ( FIG. 9A) is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed for the ending period of 1 second, and the end screen ends when the ending period ends and the jackpot finish timing comes. When the jackpot is over and the variable display based on the first holding ball (holding 1) of the second special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (FIG. 9 (b ) Reference) is started. This effect continues until the start timing of the change based on the second hold ball (hold 2). As described above, if the second special symbol is missed in the lottery, it is almost a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the variable display for 1 second based on the hold 1 ends, the small hit is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. It is displayed that the door has been successfully broken through in the opening period.

  After that, similarly, the fluctuation display for 1 second and the opening / closing door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small hit are repeated. In accordance with this, the effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the doors can be broken during each opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1. . In this way, the result of whether or not the door can be broken is notified during the opening period of the small hit after the change time has elapsed, so that the door can be broken during the change period of 1 second. You can increase your expectations for. Further, since it is possible to draw attention to the effect during the opening period of the small hit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to try to determine whether or not the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1 has already been hit. it can.

  In the production that breaks through the fourth door, after the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and the transition to the probability variation mode is notified (after the fourth small hit ends), the display mode dedicated to the probability variation mode is displayed. (Not shown) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the mode has been changed to the probability change mode.

  Drawing 11 (b) is a figure showing the case where the 2nd reservation ball of the 2nd special design is big hit F. In this case, the transition to the normal mode is notified in the door breakthrough mode effect. In the case (when either the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol), the door breakthrough mode effect is started together with the start of the ending period. When the big hit ends and the variable display of the special symbol based on the first reserved ball is started on the first symbol display device 37, the effect of trying to break through the first door is executed, and the small hit opening period Adventurer 811 breaks through the first door in line with.

  When the variable display of the special symbol based on the second holding ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the variable display for 1 second is executed based on the second holding ball, and the jackpot F is started after 1 second has elapsed. When the jackpot F is reached and the first round is started, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is notified that the adventurer 811 succeeded in breaking through the door. Then, with the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, the effect of breaking through the third door is executed, and the opening period of the second round after the interval period of 1 second (0.2 During the second second), it is notified that the third door has been successfully broken through.

  In addition, when the interval period after the end of the second round is started, an effect of breaking through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round (0. During 2 seconds), it is notified that the fourth door could not be broken through (see FIG. 10 (a)).

  After being notified that the door has not been broken through, the result display (not shown) showing the total number of prize balls paid out in the probability variation mode of this time is executed until the end of the jackpot. When the jackpot is over, the display mode dedicated to the normal mode is set.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the holding balls of the second special symbol after the big hit, the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the case where the variable display and the small hit are repeated is elapsed. At least the change (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the change over time in the state of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 11 (b)) when the jackpot E or F is included in the holding ball of the second special symbol are at least It is configured to match until the end of the door breakthrough mode production. That is, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of the big hits E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the opening period of the small hits. Further, the length of the interval period after the completion of the first to fourth rounds of the jackpots E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth holding balls of the second special symbol is the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends The operation of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the probability variation mode is notified (see FIG. 11A). Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether or not the big hit E or F has occurred from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1, and thus it is possible to pay attention to the door breakthrough mode effect until the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, in FIG. 11 (b), even when the jackpot F is achieved with the second holding ball (falling to the normal mode), the third door is breached and the fourth door is failed. However, it may be configured to simply execute the effect of failing to break through the door when either the jackpot E or F is changed while the holding ball of the second special symbol is being digested.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. , A fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Moreover, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entry. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball opening 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas includes a first The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the two-ball entrance 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a sphere is common. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability that the probability of a special symbol being a jackpot is higher than that at a low probability (special. It is divided into two types, one for the period of time of high probability state of symbols), and the number of big numbers included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 13B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof is set. Is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first special random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit shows the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are four random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "0-3" is the first per random number for low probability. It is stored in the table (see FIG. 13B). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 400, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 4, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/100". As shown in FIG. 13B, the random number value (counter value) that is a big hit is common to the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. On the other hand, random number values other than the above-mentioned jackpot random number values correspond to deviations. As described above, a small hit is included in the deviation of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 13B, when the special symbol has a low probability, random numbers that are missed in the lottery of the first special symbol are 396 pieces of “4 to 399”. On the other hand, the random number value that is missed in the lottery of the second special symbol is 37 pieces of "3 to 40", and the random number value that is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is "41 to 399". It is 359.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 40 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the value "0 to 39" is stored in the first per random number table for high probability ( See FIG. 13A). In this way, at a high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 400, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 40, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/10”. In addition, at a high probability of the special symbol, random numbers that are missed in the lottery of the first special symbol are 360 pieces of “40 to 399”. On the other hand, the random number value that is out of the lottery for the second special symbol is defined as "40", and the random number value that is a small hit in the lottery for the second special symbol is 359 of "41 to 399". Individuals are specified.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 9" is "bonus A" ( 16 round certainty jackpot). Further, the jackpot type when the value is "10 to 89" is "bonus B" (5 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "90 to 99" is "jackpot C" (2 round probability variation big hit).

  On the other hand, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the big hit type is "big hit D" (16 round probability variation big hit). Further, when the value is "5-49", the jackpot type is "big hit E" (7 round normal jackpot), and when the value is "50-99", the jackpot type is "big hit F". (6 rounds normal jackpot).

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that six types of hit types (big hits A to F) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done. As described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In other words, even if the jackpot type is decided, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. The "probability variation jackpot" described above means a jackpot of a type in which a ball easily passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during a jackpot, and "normal jackpot" means a jackpot of a type in which a ball hardly passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during a jackpot. Means

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and back" (for example in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Moreover, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage type depending on the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number values corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability times. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely missed”. In this table, the "rearward / rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front / rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "rear / rear outreach" or "reach other than front / rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is a small probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front / outside" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-front / rear reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15A) that stores a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the variation type counter CS1 value (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. This variation pattern table 202d is, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, the table 202d1 for special figure 1 (see FIG. 15 (b)). At least a special figure 1 deviation (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 15C) and a special figure 1 deviation (probability variation) table 202d3 (see FIG. 15D) are defined. Further, as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 for special figure 2 (4 variations or less) (see FIG. 16 (a)) and a special figure 2 (5 variations or more) ) Table 202d5 (see FIG. 16B), special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 (see FIG. 16C), and special figure 2 deviation (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 (figure) 16 (d)) is defined at least.

  First, referring to FIG. 15B, the special table 1 hit table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special table 1 hit table 202d1. The special diagram 1 hit table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. In the special table 1 hit table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of “0 to 50” is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. The variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set, It is selected from the table 202d1 for special figure 1.

  FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is off in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. . If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete outlier is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set. Set (Front / Rear Reach, Other Reach Reach).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As for the out-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”, and various super-reach various out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), "198" is set to various special reach (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

  FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is missed in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out-of-front and out) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

  FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less). This special figure per 2 (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d4 is selected when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the jackpot is over, and when it is a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. 3 is a data table in which the types of fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), after the big hit, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is four times or less, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of 1 second per short fluctuation. To be selected.

  FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for special figure 2 (5 or more fluctuations). The table 202d5 for this special figure 2 (5 or more fluctuations) is selected when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the jackpot is over, and when it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. 3 is a data table in which the types of fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), after the big hit, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 times or more, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation long time of 300 seconds per fluctuation time of 300 seconds. To be selected.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation table (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6. This special figure 2 deviation (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the jackpot is over, and is missed (including a small hit) in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when As shown in FIG. 16 (c), after the big hit, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or less, the fluctuation pattern is out of 1 second and the fluctuation is short regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To be selected.

  FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation table (difference of 5 or more) 202d7. The table 202d7 for this special figure 2 (5 or more fluctuations) is out of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 or more after the jackpot is over (and small hits are included). It is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in this case is defined. As shown in FIG. 16B, after the big hit, when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is 5 or more, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is a long variation with a variation time of 300 seconds. To be selected.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in a state in which the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol is 4 times or less, the lottery result is out (small hit) Whether it is a big hit or a big hit, 1 second is always set as the fluctuation time. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not one of the big hits E and F has come from the change time during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol after the big hit. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the variation time whether or not the gaming state after the variation display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbols is all finished is the probability variation mode. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the probability variation mode will be played can be made to pay more attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is executed is 5 or more and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set regardless of the lottery result. The configuration is always set to 300 seconds. As a result, if right-handing is performed in a state other than during the big hit, the special symbol lottery can be executed only once in 300 seconds (5 minutes) at the shortest (very poor game efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from making a right hit in a state other than during the big hit. If you hit right in a state other than jackpot, especially in the probability variation mode, only the second special symbol lottery is executed, so if the jackpot is a jackpot E or F that is disadvantageous to the player. It is very likely that this will happen. In other words, there is a high possibility that the player can hardly win the prize ball and fall into the normal mode after the big hit. For this reason, there is a risk that the player will be dissatisfied with the game because the game will be in the disadvantageous normal mode without being able to fully enjoy the game in the advantageous probability variation mode.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the gaming efficiency is deteriorated when the player hits the ball to the right in a state other than during the jackpot, so that it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the ball to the right in a state other than the jackpot. Therefore, the game in the probability variation mode can be more enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold in the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the winning set by the second winning random number table, it is determined as the winning of the normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table, for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal state of the normal symbol), and for the high probability that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time (of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently (see FIG. 14B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (b), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are the winning symbols of the normal symbol, and the value is "5 to 28". In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 is acquired. In, the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is within the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second As the symbol), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”, but is released. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through a normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the electric accessory 64a is opened "1 second x 3 times". To be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a is opened for "1 second × 3 times", but the opening time or The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 35). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above. ing.

  The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 of FIG. 13B), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out. “4 to 399” is defined as the range of the determined value (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B). Further, "3 to 40" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13B), and the determination value that is determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. “41 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 13B). Further, in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state), "0 to 39" is defined as the range of the determination value determined as a big hit (see 202a4 of FIG. 13 (b)), and the first special symbol is out. “40 to 399” is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B). In addition, "40" is defined as the determination value that is determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a5 in FIG. 13B), and "41 to 399 as the determination value that is determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol. Is specified (see 202a6 in FIG. 13B). When the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values corresponding to the big jackpot defined in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 13B) , It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14 (a)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. The value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, with respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "big hit A". (See 202b1 in FIG. 14A). The "big hit A" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A" is 10, so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" is opened in each round of big hits until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes for 30 seconds or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, the player can almost certainly win the upper limit number (7) of balls to the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed, by simply keeping the right hit in each round. If you hit the jackpot A, you can get a lot of prize balls. In addition, if the player continues to make a right hit in one round in which the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, the ball almost certainly passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, after the "big hit A" ends, the probability variation mode is almost certainly achieved. As described above, the “big hit A” is the most advantageous big hit type for the player, because the number of rounds is the largest and the game state after the big hit is set to the probability variation mode.

  For the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "10 to 89", and "major jackpot B" is associated and defined (see 202b2 of FIG. 14A). . The “big hit B” is a big hit with five rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit B” is 80, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the “big hit B” is determined. The ratio is 80% (80/100). Similar to the “big hit A”, the “big hit B” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes 30 seconds or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, as with the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Further, in the first round of the big hit, the ball almost certainly passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that after the "big hit B" ends, the probability variation mode is almost certainly achieved. In this way, since the “big hit B” has a smaller number of rounds than the “big hit A” (and “big hit D” described later), the number of award balls that can be won is smaller than that of the “big hit A” (and “big hit D”). However, many prize balls can be paid out. Further, since the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability variation mode, like the “big hit A”, the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player after the big hit.

  With respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99", and the "big hit C" is associated and defined (see 202b3 of FIG. 14A). .. This "big hit C" is a big hit with two rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 10, so "big hit C" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 10% (10/100). Like the “big hit A” and the “big hit B”, the “big hit C” is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes 30 seconds or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, similar to the “big hit A” and the “big hit B”, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Further, in the first round of the big hit, the balls almost certainly pass the probability variation switch 65e3, so that after the "big hit C" ends, the probability variation mode is almost certainly achieved. As described above, since the “big hit C” has the smallest number of rounds, the number of award balls that can be acquired is small, but the award balls can be paid out, so that the player can increase the number of balls he or she has. Further, since the gaming state after the big hit becomes the probability variation mode, like the "big hit A" and the "big hit B", the player shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the big hit.

  In this way, when the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the prize balls for 2 to 16 rounds can be paid out, and the gaming state after the jackpot is almost surely in the probability variation mode, Which of the jackpot types will be advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14A, with respect to the second special symbol, in the range of the value 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, "big hit D" is associated and defined. (See 202b4 in FIG. 14A). The "big hit D" is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit D" is 5, so if the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). Since this "big hit D" is the same operation as "big hit A", it is the most advantageous big hit type for the player like "big hit A".

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "5-49", "big hit E" is associated and defined (see 202b5 of FIG. 14A). .. The "big hit E" is a big hit with seven rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit E” is 45, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the “big hit E” is determined. The ratio is 45% (45/100). This "big hit E" is opened in each round of big hits until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes 0.2 seconds or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, it is difficult to even get one ball into the specific winning opening 65a in each round, so that almost no prize ball can be obtained. Further, since it is difficult to insert the ball into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the game state after the "big hit E" is finished is the "normal mode" which is almost disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, the "big hit E" is a kind of big hit that is disadvantageous to the player, since it is extremely unlikely that a prize ball can be obtained and the possibility of shifting to the "normal mode", which is disadvantageous after the big hit, is extremely high.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “50 to 99”, and the “big hit F” is associated and defined (see 202b6 of FIG. 14A). . The "big hit F" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit F” is 50, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the “big hit F” is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). Similar to the "big hit E", the "big hit F" is opened in each round of the big hit until the opening / closing door 65f1 passes 0.2 seconds or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, like the “big hit E”, the player can hardly obtain the prize ball, and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode”, which is disadvantageous after the jackpot, is extremely high, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player.

  In this way, when the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, with a high probability (95% ratio), you can hardly win the prize ball, and the gaming state after the jackpot is almost surely in the normal mode. , F, which is likely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to expect that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol, which have been increased by the balls entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, are out of the game. It is possible to provide a novel game play.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which hit determination values of normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14B). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 14B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to. , Ordinarily, it is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 is a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a second. Special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining sphere timer flag 203k, remaining sphere timer 203m, probability variation valid flag 203n It has at least a probability variation valid timer 203o, a discharge number counter 203p, a fluctuation time counter 203q, a big hit medium flag 203r, a small hit medium flag 203s, a round end flag 203t, and another memory area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type The respective values of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are execution areas ( 17 (see FIG. 17) is shifted (moved), and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b, like the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, has four reservation areas. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved first area). Among the vacant areas of 4 areas), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b Then, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls of variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of special symbols is executed (see S210 of FIG. 28).

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S211 of FIG. 28, FIG. 30). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, every time the value of the first special symbol hold ball counter 203d is changed, the variable display held by the main control device 110 is displayed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entry slot 640 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a sphere enters the second entrance 640 and the number of spheres for variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 28). The value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

  When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 33: No). ).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state (probability variation mode) of the special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol (probability variation mode). ), And if the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (normal mode). Further, as described above, in the probability variation mode, the normal symbol is in a time saving state. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is also a probability variation state of the special symbol and also indicates that it is a time saving state of the normal symbol.

  The initial value of the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, and when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, it is set to ON at the end of the big hit (see S1302 in FIG. 39). Further, the probability variation flag 203g is reset and set to OFF when the jackpot game is started (see S219 of FIG. 28).

  This probability variation flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if ON, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, while the probability variation If the flag 203g is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The probability variation flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S608, S614, S620 of FIG. 32). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 of FIG. 32), if the probability variation flag 203g is off, the lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 of FIG. 32). In the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol (S614 of FIG. 32). See S620).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the sphere passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the big hit (see S1304 in FIG. 39). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. The configuration may be configured such that 203h is officially turned on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before power-off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round for the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203p described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1415 in FIG. 40). In addition, after performing a process for determining whether the number of gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1511 in FIG. 41). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the value is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203p and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are equal to each other. After it is determined whether or not it is done, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a ball-shedding period after the round 1 is finished and the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that the ball is out of the ball. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203m described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the ball in the variable winning device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203m is the time required for discharging the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is the remaining ball timer in advance. It is set as an upper limit value of 203 m. Based on the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203m, it is determined whether or not the winning number to the variable winning device 65 and the discharging number thereof match. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. In addition, it is possible to prevent a ball from remaining illegally in the variable winning device 65 and prevent the ball from flowing down to the special discharge passage 65e2 in consideration of the timing of the first round of the big hit E or the big hit F.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being improperly added.

  The probability variation valid flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the sphere passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203n is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is based on the channel solenoid 65k being ON, and is the probability variation switch. It is shown that the time is less than or equal to the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period that the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203n is set to ON. The probability variation valid timer 203o can determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge passage 65e2 to pass the probability variation switch 65e3 is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be incorrect and is not determined to pass.

  As a result, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally put into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, or the piano is inserted from below the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball with a line or the like to allow it to pass therethrough, or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match (S1511 in FIG. 41).

  The fluctuation time counter 203q is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. A counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (see S311 in FIG. 29). Further, the variation time counter 203q is decremented by 1 in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) (see S214 in FIG. 28), and whether the variation time has elapsed based on the value of the variation time counter 203q. To be determined.

  The big hit flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit (special game state) is being performed. If the big hit medium flag 203r is on, it means that the big hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the big hit is not in progress. The big hit medium flag 203r becomes a big hit by a lottery for special symbols, and is set to ON when the big hit (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 37). Further, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the big hit medium flag 203r is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (see S201 of FIG. 28).

  The small hitting flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203s is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hitting flag 203r is a small hit in the special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the small hit is started (see S1603 in FIG. 42). Further, it is set to off when the small hit ends (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the small hit medium flag 203s is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

  The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not it is a pitching period after the jackpot round is finished. When the round end flag 203t is on, it indicates that the ball is out during the round, and when it is off, it indicates that the ball out period is over.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is performed in the hope that it will be missed by the holding ball of the second special symbol described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is roughly divided into three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, and the probability variation mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 19 are provided.

  The normal mode, as described above, shows a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of a normal symbol, and the probability of being a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. This is the most unfavorable game state for the player. Further, the probability variation mode, as described above, indicates the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the jackpot probability is high, and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. This is the most advantageous game state for the player.

  In addition, the door breakthrough mode shows a state in which there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol acquired during the execution of the probability variation jackpot (big hits A to D), and all lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is lost. If so, it is a state indicating that the game can be played in an advantageous probability variation mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same state as the probability variation mode, except that there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the probability of being a big hit in the special symbol lottery is high (1/10), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The percentage of all four reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol accumulated during the jackpot being out is about 65.6% (9/10 4th power), so the door breakthrough mode is 65.6% It can be said that the probability variation mode can be expected.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol is a big hit (big hits A to C), and if the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round, it shifts to the door breakthrough mode after the big hit ends. . As described above, in the jackpots A to C, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 by merely making a right hit in one round. If the player did not hit the ball and the ball did not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (no V was won), the game state after the jackpot was set to the normal mode again. To be done.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, from the door breakthrough mode to another mode, in addition to the case of a big hit, the process also shifts when all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the variable display based on all the reserved balls of the second special symbols in the door breakthrough mode ends, the mode changes to the probability variation mode.

  If the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 5% when the jackpot is selected in the second special symbol, the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, so after the jackpot, the door breakthrough mode is restarted. Move to. When the player does not hit the ball and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (no V prize is won), the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, if the jackpot E or the jackpot F is determined at a rate of 95% when the jackpot is the jackpot in the second special symbol, the ball is transferred to the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, almost no ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the jackpots E and F are finished, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 19, the probability variation mode is changed to another mode only when a big hit is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (big hit A to C), and if the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the big hit ends. Transition. All of the jackpots A to C are jackpot types that allow the ball to easily pass to the probability variation switch 65e3, and therefore, after the jackpot is completed, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode. When the player does not hit the ball and the ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round (no V prize is won), the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. .

  In this way, in the first embodiment, by going back and forth among the three types of modes, the lottery for the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the jackpot is all out of play. It is possible to realize a characteristic playability that a game can be played in an advantageous probability variation mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable phenomenon for the player to be a big hit again in the hold after the big hit is finished (so-called continuous play in the hold), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the big hit is held. It is possible to make the player take advantage in the expectation that no consecutive holidays will occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game play different from that of a general pachinko machine, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is for opening / closing the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing door 65f1 that closes or opens the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input / output port 205.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a secondary variation time counter. 223f, breakthrough effect counter 223g, game state storage area 223h, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area including one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. The winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is obtained. The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (waiting number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times, and the second special symbol. The symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of holding balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and stores the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e is reserved. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, from the holding ball number command, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved sphere number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved sphere number counter 223c (see S4208 of FIG. 46). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, and the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  The value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b, and the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c is used to display the holding sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to receiving the holding ball number command. Along with, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b after storage and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, the display control device 114 issues a display holding sphere number command. To send.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of holding balls corresponding to the value of the symbol holding ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b, and the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the second special symbol holding sphere counter The value is changed in synchronization with 203e. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The sub-variation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. When the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in the secondary variation time counter 223f.

  The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors that must be broken through before shifting to the probability variation mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is finished.

  The gaming state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. This game status storage area 223h is updated each time it receives a status command output from the main control device 110 each time the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4210 in FIG. 46). The game state storage area 223h is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, whether or not the least significant bit is a time saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the bit of the lower 2nd bit is a probability variation state of the special symbol is shown. Therefore, in the “normal mode”, the lower 2 bits are “00B”, while in the “door breakthrough mode” and the “probability variation mode”, the lower 2 bits are “11B”. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, a lapse timer for measuring the effect time, and the like. is doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored in the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the display control device 114 to operate as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 22 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 22 (c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 22 (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 23B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A and B, as shown in FIG. 23, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

  The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled by a simple connection.

  When the change of the rear surface type is decided and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the area between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear surface image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image of the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 23A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, while the initial stage "sand beach stage" is displayed, the game is often played without changing the stage, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" that is displayed frequently is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23B, the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” is resident only in a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data of all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range of FIG. 23A to FIG. 23B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIGS. 23A and 23B) including the initial position is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235c. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 can be stored when the change of the stage is decided by the lottery at the start of fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from the position a to the position b from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completed while being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. This allows the image data from the position b ′ to the position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the rear image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 21) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back surface image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back surface image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back surface image can be reliably displayed.

  On the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal side video RAM 236 are the images corresponding to the image between the positions b ′ and b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so that the image flows leftward.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 7) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, although the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball, the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “adventurer” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that they are displayed. When changing the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp controller 113, the control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, and for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays either the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage (either the "sand beach stage" or the "deep sea stage") selected by the player, or the back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information that specifies whether to display an image is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A and B as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 24) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines such as pachinko machines other than gaming machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means that is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 25).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 64B).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55B), and When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 55 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 55B) are displayed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 55 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed.

  In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 64B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instructions for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 26) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 55 (b (See S6303)), the pointer updating process (see S7205 in FIG. 61) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 26), the transfer data table stores the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 26, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 55 (b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 of FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit or small hit (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether either the big hit medium flag 203r or the small hit medium flag 203s is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired. Yes (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d (of the first special symbol) The variable display pending count N1) based on the lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209).

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S209), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213, which is executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of this special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the fluctuation time counter after the update. Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 becomes 0. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S215, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol is selected based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the big hit C, , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of a big hit D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S218). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S219), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. To do. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, if the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes, and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S218, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the processes of S219 and S220 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

  The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming status included in the status command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol storage sphere storage area 203b, the "special jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment) together with the first symbol It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 (S301).

  Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not the probability variation state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13B). As described above, 40 random numbers "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that the special symbol is not in the probable state of change (the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And the first hit random number table for low probability time (see FIG. 13B), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined as a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14A) to determine what the big hit type is. To do. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is a big hit A (16 round probability variation big hit). Judging, if it is in the range of "10 to 89", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (5 round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", it is a jackpot C (2 round probability variation jackpot). The determination is made (see FIG. 14A). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit D (16 round probability variation big hit), If it is in the range of "5-49", it is determined to be a big hit E (7 round normal big hit) and "50-99" is set (see FIG. 14 (a)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to F). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A to F) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big hit symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ( Change time).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including small hits) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third symbol display device is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed at 81, it is set whether it is the front / rear outreach, the reach other than the front / rear outreach, or the complete outreach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear disconnection is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol comes off in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of this fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 223q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 36). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Is a process for executing the holding process of the values indicated by the various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display holdings in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize) (S407). In this process as well, similar to the process of S401, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of variable display reservations in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S411, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are The RAM 203 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, a pre-reading process for pre-reading the winning / non-winning result from the various counter values acquired based on the starting winning is executed (S413), and the present process is ended. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In the prefetch process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 in the present start winning process (see FIG. 30). (S501), if a new incoming ball has not been detected (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that a new incoming ball has been detected (S501: Yes), whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected incoming ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S502), and when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variable display based on the entry is the probability change state of the special symbol. It is determined (S503). In the processing of S503, it is determined whether or not the state is the probable variation state, depending on the current game state and the look-ahead result of the reserve ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the pending ball does not include a big hit, the current game state and the timing to start the variable display based on the detected ball entered this time match, so the current game state is a probability change state. It is determined that In addition, when the big hit is included in the reservation ball, the game state may be changed according to the type of big hit. Specifically, when the probability variation big jackpot is suspended, the probability transition state is shifted to after the jackpot, and when the regular jackpot is suspended, the state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the ball detected this time is in the probable state.

  In the process of S503, when it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the detected ball is the probability state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the ball entrance that detected the ball and the high probability Based on the first random number table for use, a lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start time is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), based on the type of the entrance detecting the entrance and the first random number table for the low probability time. Then, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the process of S506, which is executed after the process of S504 or S505, the prize information command is set based on the type of the entrance detecting the current entrance and the lottery result acquired in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the prize information command in the prize information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), the variable display of the regular symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the first entrance This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64 a accompanying 64.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is made while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. It is included in the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period in which the special symbol is in the probability changing state and the period in which the normal symbol is in the time saving state match. Therefore, in the process of S608, if the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and if it is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, and the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability time and Based on the result, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 14B).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of 0-4, 29-239, it is normal. It is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 14B).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of the normal symbol (S611), when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes), The display mode of the hit time is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S614), and if the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S614: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( (S616), this processing ends.

  Further, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S617). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S615 or the process of S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S617, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S618, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S619). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203g is on) (S620), and the time saving state. If it is not in the middle (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1" (S621), and the process is executed. The process moves to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that it is during the time saving of the normal symbol (S620: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times of opening are set to “1 second × “Twice” (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the process of S623, the opening / closing control start of the opening time and the number of releases determined in the process of S621 or S622 is set (S623), and the present process is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 36) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S621 or the processing of S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), the processes of S620 to S623 are skipped, and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 If not (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S914 also in this case.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S914. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1015 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S915, S916) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S915, S916) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the process of S916 is completed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are allowed to execute various effects. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability variation flag 203g is read (S911), and the state command is set based on the read state of the probability variation flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the current game state. After the process of S912 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, it transmits the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 30) to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1004 is completed, next, in the case of a small hit state, a small hit control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small hit control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small hit, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed during the opening period of the small hit or whether a predetermined number of balls have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the small hit control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1005 is completed, next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric auditors product 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the opening / closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variable time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 The variable display is started at. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the variable display, and in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1009, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 34 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1014). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S901 in FIG. 35) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the specific winning opening 65a. Is a process for opening or closing.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the opening period of the big hit is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1102, the big hit medium flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol big hit (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1104). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1104: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of the new round (S1105: Yes). ), The jackpot operation setting processing for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this processing is ended. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when the special game state (all the rounds of big hits) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined to be the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1107, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1107: Yes), the ending command is set (S1108), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), then the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1110), and this process ends To do. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1109: No), the winning process for performing the process corresponding to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111). . The details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1111) is finished, an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball entering the specific winning port 65a is normally discharged is executed (S1112), and the process is finished. Details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the big hit operation setting process (S1106). This big hit operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

  When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the current round is not the first round, the processing of S1203 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1204), and this process ends.

  The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the big hit.

  By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of jackpot, and the special discharge passage 65e2 can be set to pass in the first round. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A to D, the player only makes a right hit in the first round, and the ball almost certainly passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, after the jackpot, the probability variation mode (the probability variation state of the special symbol, and ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 5, such ,, not that, the normal design time saving state) may be entered? Also, in the case of the big hits E and F, the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, but as described above, the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds), Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during one round, the probability that the ball will pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, when the jackpot E or F is reached, it is possible to set the normal mode after the jackpot. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which one of the types of jackpots A to C is determined when it is a jackpot is a lottery advantageous to the player, and when it is a jackpot, a high probability (95% of The lottery for the second special symbol in which either the jackpot E or F is determined by the ratio) can be a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, details of the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1110). This big hit ending process (S1110) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end as described above.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301). In the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit, so the probability variation flag 203g should be set to on. The state after the big hit is set to the probability variation mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the big hit (see S219 of FIG. 28), the process of S1302 is skipped, so that the probability variation flag 203g is turned off after the big hit. That is, the normal mode is set after the jackpot is over.

  In the process of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g (S1303). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the gaming status storage area 223h in accordance with the gaming status notified by the status command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the big hit medium flag 203r and the probability variation setting flag 203h are both set to OFF (S1304), and this processing ends.

  By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 39), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40, details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the valid period (S1401). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of S1401, if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), this processing is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the present is the round valid period (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. When the winning is detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and the winning command indicating that the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (S1404) and the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and if the round time has elapsed. (S1406: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1406, when the big hits this time are big hits A to D, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, and when the big hits E and F, the start of the round. It is determined that the round time has elapsed when 0.2 seconds has elapsed from the.

  In the process of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and the closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether or not the current closing of the specific winning opening 65a is based on the end of one round (S1409), and if it is determined to be based on the end of one round (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid is determined. The (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of a round other than one round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is turned on. Is not set to S1410, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the probability variation valid flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. Further, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 6 or less in the process of S1405 (S1405: No) and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), S1407. The process of step S1411 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is on (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag 203t is on (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is the upper limit value ( S1418). Then, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process shifts to the process of S1413 to monitor the probability variation switch 65e3 and update the probability variation setting flag 203h. As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time for ball spattering. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a sphere by mistake and being given a probability variation state.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are turned off (S1419), and the value of the probability variation valid timer 203o is reset (S1420). ), And this processing ends.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1413), and if the ball has not passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i (S1414), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413), and this processing is executed. To finish.

  Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormal process (S1112) is a process that is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, it is determined whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally discharged. This is processing for.

  In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the round valid period (S1501), and if it is not the round valid period (S1501: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharged number counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the ball does not pass the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is in the ball-expelling period, and the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharged particles (the total value of the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the value of the discharged number counter 203p) is won. It is determined whether or not it matches the number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1507).

  In the processing of S1507, when it is determined that the number of ejected coins does not match the number of winning coins (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act in which a ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow channel 65e2 and passes through the probability variation switch 54e3 while the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the discharged number and the winning number match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203p, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset (S1511), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 41), a ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning a prize device 65 and the like, which causes a problem that the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a cannot be normally discharged. It can be detected and notified early.

  Next, the details of the small hit control process (S1005) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the small hit control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the small hit state.

  In this small hit control process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit start timing (S1601), and if it is the small hit start timing (S1601: Yes), the small hit An opening command indicating a winning opening is set (S1602), the small hit medium flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is in progress (S1604), and if it is determined that it is not in the small hit (S1604). : No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small hit (( S1605) If it is the opening timing of the opening operation (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the opening / closing door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the opening operation (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending period (S1607), and if it is the ending timing of the ending period (S1607: (Yes), the ending command indicating that the ending period for the small hit has started is set (S1608), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S1607, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609), and if it is the end timing of the small hit. (S1609: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203s is set to OFF (S1610), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the small hit medium prize winning process for determining the end of the opening period of the small hit is executed (S1611). The details of this small hit medium winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the small winning medium winning process (S1611) is completed, an abnormal process is executed to determine whether the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a matches the number of balls that have been ejected (S1612), and this process ends. To do. This abnormal process (S1612) is the same process as the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and thus the details thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the small hitting medium winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small hit opening period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hit medium prize winning process (S1611). In the small hitting prize winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the small hitting round is in the valid period (S1701). The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when it is determined that it is the round valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball to the specific winning port 65a is detected (S1702), and the winning of the ball is detected. When it is determined that it has been done (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1702 that the winning for the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704), and if it is less than 7 (S1704: No), then the round time (0.2 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1705: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the small hit opening period. On the other hand, in the process of S1704, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and when it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the process of S1705 (S1705: Yes). Since it means that the ending condition of the small hit opening period is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1706), and this processing is ended.

  Since it is almost impossible to win 7 or more balls to the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds, which is the round time for a small hit, when the small hit is almost specified After the winning port 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds, the specific winning port 65a is closed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 52. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S4116 (see FIG. 45) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), the power-off process in S4116 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S4116 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the power-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the startup processing this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the process of S4002, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the power-off process of S4116, It is started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S4004 to start initialization of the RAM 223.

  In the processing of S4004, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  In the processing of S4005, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( (S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 of FIG. 45). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed. Therefore, the process of S4008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing of S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S4010, the notification contents of the status command set in the startup processing (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is analyzed (S4011), and the game status storage area 223h according to the analysis result. The data of is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped even after the power is turned on. After the process of S4012, the interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the process of step S4008 with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S4004 to S4006 is performed and the process of step S4008 is performed. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S4009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004 when the process of S4004 goes to the process of S4008 through the processes of S4006. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102-S4110. In S4101, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly in S4102 to S4110 related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a reservation lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 223b and the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 223c is performed.

  After that, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to the change this time, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the feeling of expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S4107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S4108), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4110 ends, the process proceeds to S4111. In the processing of S4111, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the processing of S4113, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4113: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are both set to ON (S4115), and the power-off occurs. Processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 45) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4201). In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern command is received from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4203), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206), and The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). . When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Value (holding number N1 of the variable display based on the first special symbol lottery), or the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display based on the second special symbol) is extracted, Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). In addition, in the processing of S1708, the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, the value of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c that has been updated is set to the display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114. . After the processing of S4208 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) or when the special symbol is drawn. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the process of S08. The value of the symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d, and even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, at the time of detection of the starting winning or the lottery of the special symbol, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be corrected, and can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the process of S4208 is executed, the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the display holding ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c Several commands are set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command is not received (S4207: No), it is then determined whether the state command is received from the main control device 110 (S4209). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, when the probability variation mode is notified based on the information according to the game state (whether the probability variation state or not) notified by the state command, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to "11B". On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to "00B". Accordingly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4209, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4211). In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the prize information command is received (S4211: Yes), the prize information command processing for performing control according to the pre-read result of the new starting prize notified by the prize information command is executed. Then (S4212), the present process is terminated. Details of the winning information command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

  In the processing of S4211, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then whether or not the command related to the jackpot (either the opening command, the round number command, or the ending command) has been received. It is determined (S4213). When it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), the jackpot related process for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command associated with the jackpot is executed (S4214), This process ends. Details of the jackpot-related processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4213: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S4215), and the present process ends. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the above-described winning information command processing (S4212) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the winning information command process (S4212).

  In the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47), first, the information notified by the received winning command (the type of the winning opening in which a new starting winning is detected and the information indicating the lottery result) is set in the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the processing of S4301 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current notification of the prize information command is the prize information of the second special symbol (S4302). In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the notification of this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (is the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the present winning information is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hits A to D are currently being executed (S4303), and the big hit. If it is determined that any of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ending period is in progress (S4304). If it is not in the ending period, the adventurer 811 Selects the mode of the key 813 in the effect of discovering the key 813 (see FIG. 8B) (S4305). In the process of S4305, if the winning information of this time is winning information corresponding to the lottery result of out-of-range (small hit), the rate of selecting the key 813 in a luxurious form becomes high, and the winning information of this time is jackpot E, F. If the winning information corresponds to, the rate of selecting the key 813 in a poor state (tattered) is high. When the process of S4305 ends, an effect for finding the key 813 in the mode selected in the process of S4305 is set (S4306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the big hits A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and when it is determined that the big hits A to D are in the ending period in the process of S4304 (S4304: Yes). As a result of the player making a right-handed hit during a period in which the player should make a left-handed hit, it means that a starting winning prize for the second entrance 640 has been detected, so stopping the right-handed hit and returning it to the left-handed hit A warning effect for notifying the person is executed (S4307), and this processing ends. This warning effect (not shown) is stronger left-handed to the player than the character "left-handed" and the image of the left-pointing arrow displayed in the display area HR1 during execution of the door-breakthrough mode effect. An effect of instructing is executed. Specifically, for example, the character "Left-handed" is displayed in large size on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect that the voice "Please return to left-handed" repeatedly flows at the maximum volume is executed. To be done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from making a right hit in a situation other than during the jackpots A to D. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to make a right hit during the normal mode or the probability variation mode, and continuously performing the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery.

  By executing this prize information command processing, it is possible to appropriately set the mode of the key 813 to be found during the big hit, based on the new prize information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation of the probability variation mode based on the mode of the key 813. Therefore, the player's game during the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. You can improve your interest in.

  In the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 is changed depending on whether or not the prize information of the second special symbol newly notified by the prize information command is out (small hit). Although the configuration has been made, not only the winning information based on the new winning information command, but also the configuration of selecting the mode of the key 813 based on the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a Good. Specifically, for example, prior to receiving the current prize information command, the prize information corresponding to one of the jackpots E and F is included in the prize information already stored in the prize information storage area 223a. In the case where it is included, the proportion of selecting the key 813 in a poor state (battered) may be increased regardless of the result of the lottery of the present winning information. With such a configuration, the more consecutive the keys 813 in a poor manner (tattered), the higher the possibility that the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol. It is possible to more accurately infer whether or not jackpots E and F are included in the holding balls. Further, for example, when all of the winning information command of this time and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a prior to receiving this winning information command are out (small hit), the selection ratio May be configured to be high (or selected only in this case) (for example, the mode of the diamond key 813). With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for shifting to the probability variation mode when the mode is displayed.

  In the first embodiment, when the prize information command corresponding to the second entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. Even when a new ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit value, the warning effect is executed if it is outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D. It may be configured. In particular, during the ending of the big hits A to D and during the execution of the first variable display, it is highly possible that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit value. In such a case, if the player is making a right hit, a new starting prize is generated for the second entrance 640, so that the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed five or more times after the big hit. There is a possibility that the player may lose. On the other hand, when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the player may lose the game by setting the warning effect. Can be suppressed (prevented).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot-related processing (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S4214).

  In the jackpot-related process, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S4401), and if an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display opening command is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect for notifying the start of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81. When the process of S4402 ends, the main jackpot-related process (see FIG. 48) ends. If the opening command this time is a command corresponding to the opening of either big hit E, F, or small hit, and the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode is executed. The production continues as it is. In this case, the opening command itself may not be output to the display control device 114, or the display control device 114 side determines whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed and selects the effect mode. It may be configured to.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4401, if it is determined that the opening command is not received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S4403). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S4404), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Yes (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S4405, this processing ends. Similar to the case where the opening command is received, when the timing of starting a new round of jackpots E and F is being executed during the door breakthrough mode effect, the door breakthrough mode effect is continued.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S4403: No), it is then determined whether the closing command is received from the main control device 110 (S4406). When it is determined that the close command has been received (S4406: Yes), the close command process for performing control according to the situation where the close command is received is executed (S4406), and this process ends. Details of this closing command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4405, when it is determined that the closing command is not received (S4405: No), it is then determined whether the ending command is received (S4407). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), the ending command process for performing control according to the type and the situation of the ending command is executed (S4408), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4407, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this processing ends as it is. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

  Details of the above-described closing command process (S4406) will be described below with reference to FIG. 49. In this closing command process (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4501), and if it is determined to be one of the jackpots A to D ((S4501)). S4501: Yes), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is one other than jackpots A to D (either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0. (That is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed), and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door break mode effect is not being executed). ) (S4502: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4503). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction becomes 0 (that is, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this process is directly terminated to continue the door breakthrough mode effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction becomes 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is finished, so the remaining period until the jackpot is over. The result display is set (S4505), and this processing ends. The result display indicates the display content for displaying the total number of prize balls paid out by repeating the big hit and the probability variation mode this time, the number of big hits, and the like on the third symbol display device 81. By setting this result display, it is possible to easily grasp the number of jackpots won by the player, the number of prize balls acquired, and the like, so that the player can have a sense of accomplishment.

  Next, the details of the ending command processing (S4408) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the ending command process (S4408) is a process for performing control according to the jackpot type, the game situation, and the like when the ending command is received.

  In this ending command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an ending command indicating the ending of a small hit (S4601), and if it is determined that the ending is a small hit (S4601: Yes), a small hit. The small hitting control processing for performing control according to the timing of ending the is executed (S4602), and the present processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the ending is not for the small hit (S4601: No), the ending command of this time is output to notify that the ending engine for the big hit has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the big hit being executed is one of the big hits A to D (S4603).

  In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the big hit being executed is not one of the big hits A to D (S4603: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot in execution is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning information of the second special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S4604), and the winning is read. It is determined whether or not the jackpot D is included in the lottery results of the reserved balls of the second special symbol indicated by the information. In addition, as described above, the jackpot D is the only jackpot of the second special symbols, which is an advantageous jackpot type in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained and the probability variation mode is set after the jackpot.

  In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), a special mode of the door breakthrough mode is informed that the jackpot has been hit during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. The effect is set (S4606), and this processing ends. As described above, after the jackpots A to D are completed, basically it becomes advantageous for the player if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. This is because if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, either the jackpot E or F, which is disadvantageous with a high probability (95% ratio), will be produced. However, in the case of a big win in the lottery for the second special symbol, there is a case where the big win D is advantageous to the player with a low probability (5% ratio). In this case, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the door breakthrough mode effect is set again after the big hit, which is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of the big hits E and F. Therefore, in this case, the player can easily understand that the big hit D has been achieved by setting the door breakthrough mode effect in a special notification mode.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is not included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol (S4605: No), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is set to 4 (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol (S4608). In the process of S4608, when it is determined that the big hit is included, it means that either the big hit E or F is given during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the shift to the normal mode is made after the big hit ends. Finally, a door break-through mode effect of a mode of notifying the fall to the normal mode (a mode of failing to break through the door) is set (S4609), and this processing is ended. As the effect time of the door breakthrough mode effect, the same effect time of 5.8 seconds is set regardless of whether or not a big hit is included. In this 5.8 seconds, when all the holding balls of the 2nd special symbol are out (small hit), from the start of the ending engine to the end of the small hit based on the fourth holding ball It is a period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not there is a big hit in the hold ball from the effect time, the effect time of the door breakthrough mode effect is the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

  In the processing of S4608, when it is determined that the holding ball does not include a big hit (S4608: No), the door break-through mode effect is finally set to notify the transition to the probability variation mode (S4610). ), And this processing ends. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 50), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the content of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-mentioned small hitting end time process (S4602) will be described. This small hit end time process (S4602) is a process executed when it is determined in the ending command process (see FIG. 50) that the received ending command is a small hit ending command.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hit end time process (see FIG. 51), first, whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed). If the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and the process is terminated. The case where the small hit occurs outside the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect is a case where the player intentionally or negligently hits the right hit outside the execution period of the big hits A to D (the period in which the left hit should be performed). is there. In this case, the warning effect is set by the process of S4307 of the prize information command process (see FIG. 47) at the time when the start winning for the second ball entrance 640 is detected, so that the player has already returned to the left hit. It is believed that Therefore, at the end of the small hit, control such as performing a warning effect again is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by repeating the warning effect despite returning to left-handedness.

  In the process of S4701, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4702), and the counter value after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (S4703). When it is determined in the processing of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result of miss (small hit) (that is, all of the door breakthrough mode effects. Since it means that the fluctuation is out of order, the effect mode indicating the entry into the probability variation mode is set (S4704), and the process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4703, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, and therefore the book is left as it is. The process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S4806 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 46). In the process of (1), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4803).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4804). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area.

  In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4806: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4807), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). At, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, the display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808 (S4809), and the present process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, the stop type of the third symbol is controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. To be done.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 66. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 53). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 include all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed following the process of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is executed in S6101. Also, after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, “OFF” or “0” is set unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 64 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 64A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during this period, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)). The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation is performed. You can direct. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, and its transfer takes time, so that the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55A, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305). 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S6307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front / rear reach, non-front / rear reach, complete disconnection). ) Corresponding to the stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to F, small hit, out of reach, and completely out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of fluctuations at a distance of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the number-of-rounds command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903) and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the back image change command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back surface image discrimination flag provided for each back surface image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7002. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S7002 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident type) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back surface image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S7102), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area, and if there is a new unprocessed command (S6401: Yes). ), And the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. The extraction is performed and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 57B), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 57A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S6502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the content thereof is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

  In the task process (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle of each sprite are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 61. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S7403), and if it is the demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering image developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite, Various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalized display. Therefore, the finalized display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The contents are set (S7210), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, and thus a fixed time has elapsed from the end of the fixed display effect. After that, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, thereby clearing the contents (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines the stop display of the image is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 64A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the processing proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the unresident A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 55 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) previously executed from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after the image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7708), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (usually The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the processing of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal image transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a sub as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal image image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the fanfare production can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 55B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the position where the ball easily enters when left-handed (a game method of launching the ball toward the flow path on the left side in the front view of the game board 13) is performed. When the ball is placed right in the first entrance 64 and is hit to the right (a game method of launching the ball toward the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front), the ball becomes easier to enter (when hitting to the left) The second ball entrance 640 is provided at a position where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter. If the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the ball has entered the second entrance 640, it will be a disadvantage to the player (in addition to the prize ball is hardly obtained during the jackpot) There is a high possibility that it will move to the unfavorable normal mode after a big hit), while a big hit in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the game It is configured to increase the possibility of being advantageous to the person (in addition to being able to obtain a large number of prize balls in the jackpot and shifting to an advantageous probability variation mode after the jackpot). As a result, it is possible to make the player think that it is desired to execute the lottery of the advantageous first special symbol rather than the lottery of the disadvantageous second special symbol.

  In addition, the flow path on the right side in the front view of the game board 13 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a which is opened during the jackpot and a large amount (11 pieces) of winning balls are paid out each time a ball is entered. Similar to the second entrance 640, the specific winning opening 65a allows the ball to enter when the player strikes to the right (easy to enter), and cannot enter the ball when performing left to hit (difficult to enter). It is provided at the position. Therefore, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right in order to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit and obtain the prize ball. As described above, when the ball is hit to the right, the ball also enters the second ball entrance 640, so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be accumulated to the upper limit after the big hit. For this reason, after the jackpot, it is possible to form a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous when the jackpot is achieved, is continuously executed, so that the player is given the second special accumulated during the jackpot. A game can be played in the hope that all the reserved balls in the design will be out (small hits). That is, in a general pachinko machine, it is a preferable event for the player to be a big hit again in the hold after the big hit ends (so-called continuous play in the hold), but in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, It is possible to make the player take advantage in the expectation that an on-hold resort does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game play different from that of a general pachinko machine, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, each time the holding balls of the second special symbol increase during the execution of the jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased holding balls is pre-read, and the effect according to the pre-reading result is produced. Is configured to execute. That is, it is configured to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result will be out (small hit). More specifically, the effect that the adventurer 811 obtains the key 813 in a mode corresponding to the pre-reading result of the increased reserved ball lottery result is executed. By this effect, the player can be inferred from the mode of the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the probability variation mode during the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming like a work for simply obtaining a prize ball, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the jackpot game.

  Further, in the first embodiment, from the ending period of the jackpot A to D, until the change time of all the variable display based on the holding balls of the second special symbol elapses, the holding balls of the second special symbol An effect for notifying the player whether or not the jackpots E and F are present is executed. That is, even after all the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is finished, the effect for suggesting whether the game state remains in the probability variation mode or falls into the normal mode is executed. . By having a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, when the second special symbol is missed in the lottery, the small hit is made with a high probability. The opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small hit and the opening period of the opening / closing door 65f1 in each round of the big hits E and F are the same (0.2 seconds). Further, the length of the interval period after the completion of the first to fourth rounds of the big hits E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the variation time in the variation display of the second special symbol. . By configuring in this way, even if any of the first to fourth holding balls of the second special symbol is the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode effect ends A series of opening / closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the probability variation mode is notified (when all the reserved balls of the second special symbols are small hits). That is, regardless of whether or not the jackpots E and F are included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, as the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the end of the jackpot to the end of the door breakthrough mode effect It is possible to unify the operation in which the closing for 1 second and the opening for 0.2 seconds are repeated four times. Therefore, it is difficult to determine from the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 after the end of the big hit, whether it is the opening / closing operation due to continuous small hits or the opening / closing operation due to the big hit E or F. You can make the door breakthrough mode production pay attention to the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a big hit by the variable display of the first special symbol before the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery is executed, so during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect , It is possible to make the left-handing more aggressive. In this case, in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is off, a variation pattern of a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 10%). . With this configuration, during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute the lottery for the first special symbol one or more times, so a chance to win the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol. Can be formed.

  In the first embodiment, the left-hand hit is notified from the start of the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the player can be notified not to continue right-handing after the jackpot is over. By displaying the characters such as “”, the player may be switched to left-handed playing immediately after the ending condition of the final round is satisfied. This can prevent the ball from entering the second ball inlet 640 after the jackpot is over.

  In the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is uniformly 3 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit is 1 second × The configuration is set to twice, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, after the jackpot, only the variation time of the first ordinary symbol, at least a time longer than the period until all the variation based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is completed (for example, 10 seconds) may be set. Good. With this configuration, during the door breakthrough mode performance, the normal symbol does not hit, so from the opening time of the ordinary symbol, it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery and becomes a low probability state of the ordinary symbol. It can be difficult to determine whether it has fallen or whether the time-saving state of the normal pattern is maintained. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect.

  In the first embodiment, when the second special symbol is missed in the lottery, it is configured to be a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the second special symbol is out of place, instead of configuring all to be simply out, change the variation time in the case of a big hit according to the number of changes after the big hit, door breakthrough mode From the start of the effect until the jackpot of the second special symbol is started, and from the start of the door breakthrough mode effect until the end of all four variable displays corresponding to the deviation of the second special symbol A configuration may be adopted in which the period (the period until shifting to the probability variation mode) is made to match. More specifically, after the big hit, if the big win in the first lottery of the second special symbol, 4 seconds as the fluctuation time is set, if the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol of the second time , 3 seconds is set as the variation time, and if the third lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, 2 seconds is set as the variation time and the fourth lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. In this case, 1 second may be set as the variation time. With this configuration, 4 seconds (1 second x 4), which is the total variation time when the four holding balls of the second special symbol are all disengaged, and in the case of a big hit on the way, It is possible to match the period (4 seconds) until the jackpot is started. Therefore, during the four seconds after the jackpot end, which is the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect, even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is included in the reserved ball, the specific winning opening 65a is not opened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is known from the operation of the specific winning opening 65a whether or not to shift to the probability variation mode before the door breakthrough mode effect ends. The period from when the door breakthrough mode effect is started to when the jackpot of the second special symbol is started, the variable display corresponding to the deviation of the second special symbol four times after the door breakthrough mode effect is started. If the length is longer than the period until all ends, the jackpot is not started at least during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, when the second special symbol is simply a big hit, the variation time may be set to be equal to or more than the sum of the variation times of the variation display corresponding to the deviation of the second special symbol for four times.

  In the first embodiment, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a for 1 to 4 rounds of the big hits E and F and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a for the small hit are the same (0.2 seconds). However, it may be arbitrarily set as long as it is not possible for the player to distinguish whether it is the opening period of the big hit or the opening period of the small hit by feeling the difference. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery of the first special symbol is advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. And, if a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the production that succeeds in breaking through the door in the door breakthrough mode production is executed, and if the lottery of the second special symbol is all out, the breakthrough of the door fails. The effect may be configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to realize a more easy-to-understand game, that is, a big hit if the door is successfully broken through. Further, in this case, the first ball entrance 64 may be deleted and only the second ball entrance 640 may be provided. That is, you may comprise so that only the lottery of a 2nd special symbol may be performed.

  In the first embodiment, while the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big hit is being executed, it becomes difficult to understand whether the big hit or the small hit has been made in the lottery of the second special symbol. Although the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set as described above, it is not limited to during the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol that makes it difficult to know whether it is a big hit or a small hit. For example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit, and the same operation as the small hit (the same operation, or an operation that the player cannot distinguish from the small hit) Good.

  In the present first embodiment, whether or not all the holding balls of the second special symbol held during the big hit are out (small hit) (whether to shift to the probability variation mode), the ending period of the big hit is started. From the above, it is configured to be executed over a period until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that at least a part of the transition to the probability variation mode, the transition to the probability variation mode is notified during the ending period. That is, at the beginning of the ending period, the lottery results of the reserved balls of the second special symbol are pre-read, and when it is determined that all the pre-read results are out of place (small hits), there is a certain probability that the probability changes during the big hit ending period. It may be configured to notify the shift to the mode. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the probability variation mode earlier, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, when notifying the transition to the probability variation mode during the ending period, an effect of breaking through the four doors at once may be executed, or an effect different from the normal door breaking mode effect is executed. Good. Here, as the effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect, for example, a configuration in which the theme song of the adventurer 811 is played may be executed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is blacked out. After that, you may perform the effect that the character "probability variation mode confirmation" appears on the display screen. Furthermore, when the effect that is confirmed to be shifted to the probability variation mode is executed during the ending period, the effect is performed until the fluctuation based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is finished (that is, until the probability variation mode is started. ) It may be configured to continue execution. With such a configuration, for a player who knows the transition to the probability variation mode early (during the ending period), it is possible to shift to the probability variation mode in the remaining period until the transition to the probability variation mode. You can immerse yourself in the finish. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

  Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the transition to the probability variation mode is notified before the ending period. More specifically, when the start winning corresponding to the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected, and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command. , It is determined whether or not all the winning information of the second special symbol is out (small hit). Then, when all the winning information is out (small hit), it may be configured to execute the effect indicating the transition to the probability variation mode at that time. In addition, as an effect indicating the transition to the probability variation mode, for example, an adventurer 811 may execute an effect of discovering a key 813 in a special (premium) mode. It may be configured to change the music playing inside to a special (premium) music.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the normal winning passage 65e1 and the special discharging passage 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 of the special discharging passage 65e2 is provided during the jackpot. When the ball passes, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probability variation mode. Further, the probability variation mode and the big hit are unlimitedly repeated as long as the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is predetermined for each jackpot type. In addition, it is configured to set an upper limit on the number of consecutive special variation state of the special symbol, and when the upper limit is reached, even if you win the probability variation jackpot, it is configured to be set to a low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit. There is.

  In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from making a right-handed hit during normal times (states other than during a big hit), when a starting winning prize for the second entrance 640 is detected during normal times, It was configured to execute a warning effect.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second ball entrance 640, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while being normally blocked by the electric accessory 640b. It is configured to be difficult to do. Further, during the big hit state, the electric accessory 640b provided along with the second entrance 640 is controlled so as to be easily opened, so that the second special hit is performed during the big hit as in the first embodiment. The reserve balls of the design are configured to accumulate up to the maximum number. In addition, since the electric accessory 640b is provided in association with the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. .

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that the structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, And that the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. Is partly changed. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 67, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A variable winning device 650 and a second entrance 640 are provided on the downstream side of the normal entrance 67. The variable winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and as a winning opening in which 13 prize balls are paid out every time a ball wins the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650. It is configured. The specific winning opening 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can be entered (easy) and a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered (difficult), and is opened in each round of jackpots. Set to state.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the second entrance 640 is provided with the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second ball inlet 640 and an open position that allows the ball to enter. The case where it is variable is illustrated. Although the details will be described later, this electric accessory 640a performs operation control so that the ball is easier to enter in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. Be seen. More specifically, when the high probability state of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol is slightly higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol (199/240 → 200/240), but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long. Along with (3 seconds → 30 seconds), the opening period of the electric accessory 640b in the case of hitting a normal symbol becomes short (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, in the high probability state of a normal symbol as a whole, it becomes more difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is a disadvantageous second special. It is possible to prevent the drawing of symbols from being executed. In addition, during a big hit that is set to a low probability state of a normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  By attaching the electric accessory 640b to the second entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. Further, a special device 1 small hit prize device 655 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. This special figure 1 small hit winning device 655, when the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 small hit winning opening 655a is set to the open state, the ball into the inside It becomes possible to enter the ball. In the second embodiment, when the probability variation mode is set, the probability of being a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is significantly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000), and left-handing is performed during the probability variation mode. In this case, the number of balls to be consumed is the same as the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter the special prize 1 prize hole 655a due to the small prize in the lottery for the first special symbol. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when left-handed hitting is performed during the probability variation mode, without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the downstream side of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. The flow path is branched in approximately three directions. That is, the flow path to the second winning opening 640, the flow path to the variable winning device 650, and the outlet 66 without going to any of these (the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 650a). It is branched to a flow path that flows down to. With this configuration, similarly to the first embodiment, it is possible to allow a part of the ball, which is hit by hitting the right to the specific winning port 650a, during the jackpot to enter the second winning port 640. it can. Therefore, the holding balls of the second special symbol can be configured to accumulate up to the upper limit number during the big hit. As a result, also in the second embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol executed after the big hit is all missed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a flow path toward the second ball entrance 640 by a plurality of nails, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the outlet 66. And form. Therefore, by adjusting the nail by the clerk in the hall, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second winning port 640 and the ratio of the balls distributed to the specific winning port 650a. Therefore, adjustments can be made according to the management policy of the hall, and the more convenient pachinko machine 10 can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the first random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the second embodiment, the range of possible values of the first hit type counter C1 is expanded to 0 to 999.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the low-probability state of the special symbol, "0-9" is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined as a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 68 (a)). Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, the determination value that is a jackpot is common to the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Further, "10-998" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the determination value determined to be the small hit of the first special symbol. “999” is specified as the range. Further, "10, 11" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 of FIG. 68 (a)), and the determination value of the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. “12 to 999” is specified as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 68 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state), the range of the judgment value that is a big hit, the judgment value that is out, and the range of the judgment value that is a small hit are all the first special symbol and the first It is common with 2 special designs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), “0 to 10” is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined as a big hit (see 202a4 in FIG. 68 (a)), and the determination to be out of alignment is made. “11” is defined as the value (see 202a5 of FIG. 68A), and “12 to 999” is defined as the determination value of the small hit (see 202a6 of FIG. 68A).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is made different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol. Then, the probability of being a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls consumed when left-handed in the probability variation mode, and a small hit in the lottery for the first special symbol, the balls enter the special figure 1 small hit prize hole 655a The number of prize balls to be paid out is the same. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when left-handed hitting is performed during the probability variation mode, without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the small hit of the second special symbol and the small hit of the first special symbol are configured so that the number of prize balls that the player can obtain is different, and the small hit of the first special symbol is more prizes. It is designed to be able to get a ball. On the other hand, in the small hit of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for only 0.2 seconds, which makes it difficult for the player to win the prize ball. Therefore, if the player hits the ball to the right in normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and it is easy to determine the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous even if a jackpot is obtained, and the prize ball is awarded even if a jackpot is obtained. Since it can hardly be obtained, it is disadvantageous to the player as compared to the case of left-handed play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits the ball right in normal times.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68 (b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the second embodiment, three types of big hits A2 to C2 are provided as big hit types of the first special symbol, and big hits D2 as big hit types of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), with respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "big hit A2" in a range of "0 to 9". (See 202b1 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit A2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A2" is 10, so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" is opened in each round of big hits until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until 6 balls are won. Therefore, in each round, it is possible for the player to almost certainly win the upper limit number (six) of balls to the specific winning opening 650a before 30 seconds have elapsed, by only keeping the right hit. If you hit the jackpot A, you can get a lot of prize balls.

  For the first special symbol, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 69", "big hit B2" is associated and defined (see 202b2 of FIG. 68 (b)). . This "big hit B2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 7, and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit B2" is 60, so if the big prize is drawn in the lottery for the first special symbol, the "big hit B2" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100). Like the "big hit A2", the "big hit B2" is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. Therefore, as in the case of "big hit A2", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  With respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "big hit C2" (see 202b3 of FIG. 68 (b)). . This "big hit C2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is two and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C2" is 30, so "big hit C2" is determined when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). Like the "big hit A2" and the "big hit B2", the "big hit C2" is opened in each round of the big hit until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until six balls are won. .. Therefore, similar to the “big hit A” and the “big hit B”, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  In this way, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the payout of prize balls for 2 rounds, 7 rounds, or 16 rounds can be received, and the gaming state after the jackpot is almost surely changed. Therefore, no matter which jackpot type is selected, it is advantageous for the player. Further, since the number of rounds, which is relatively large, is determined to be 7 rounds and 16 rounds is high (70% rate), it is possible to expect a large number of prize balls to be won when the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, the player can be pleased when the jackpot is taken in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), with respect to the second special symbol, in the range of the value 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, "big hit D2" is associated and defined. (See 202b4 in FIG. 68 (b)). The "big hit D2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit D2" is 5, so "big hit D2" is determined when a big hit is made in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit D2" is opened in each round of big hits until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 30 seconds or until 6 balls are won. Therefore, a relatively large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), with respect to the second special symbol, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5-99", "big hit E2" is associated and defined. (See 202b5 in FIG. 68 (b)). This "big hit E2" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is four and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit E2" is 95, so if the big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the "big hit E2" is determined. The ratio is 95% (95/100). Unlike other jackpot types, this "jackpot E2" is opened in each round of jackpot until the specific winning opening 650a elapses for 0.2 seconds or until 6 balls are won. Since it is difficult to throw a ball into the specific winning opening 650a within 0.2 seconds, the “big hit E2” is a disadvantageous big hit type in which a prize ball cannot be obtained. In addition, as described above, the upper limit (4 times) is provided for the number of consecutive special variation states of the special symbols, and when the jackpot is reached when the upper limit number is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is over regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to be in a disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if the "big hit E" is reached, it is not possible for the player to win a prize ball, and the number of times until the normal mode is shifted is subtracted, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the remaining jackpot until the normal mode is set cannot be obtained with a high probability (95% ratio). The jackpot type (big hit E2) that reduces the number of times is determined. That is, as in the first embodiment, if the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, it is likely to result in an unfavorable result for the player. As a result, during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol after the jackpot is over, it is possible to perform the game in the hope that the lottery result will be off You can

  Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the ordinary symbol, “5 to 203” is defined (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is stipulated as the judgment value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 69). That is, the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state), and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the number of the determination value that is determined to hit the normal symbol is different by only one. Thereby, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the hit probability almost equal to the high probability state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol becomes longer than that in the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and when the ordinary symbol hits, the electric motor. The opening period of the accessory 640b becomes shorter (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 second × 1 time). Therefore, in the high probability state of a normal symbol as a whole, it becomes more difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is a disadvantageous second special. It is possible to prevent the drawing of symbols from being executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed in a situation other than the situation where the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during a big hit that is set to a low probability state of a normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 202. As shown in FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 202 in the second embodiment is obtained by adding a probability variation limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab to the configuration of the RAM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). It is different in that there is. Further, the difference is that the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the probability variation valid flag 203n, the probability variation valid timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are deleted.

  The probability variation limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of continuous probability variation states until the normal mode is set. This probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4, which is the maximum number of consecutive probability variation states when the normal mode is set as the state after the jackpot ends (see S1314 in FIG. 78), and each time the probability variation jackpot ends. , The value is subtracted by 1 (see S1311 in FIG. 78). When the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the jackpot, the normal mode is set after the jackpot.

  The breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the door breakthrough mode effect, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set as a counter value at the end of the jackpot A2 to D2 (see S1316 in FIG. 78). ), The value is decremented by 1 at the start of fluctuation and updated (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab (the number of remaining fluctuations until the door break-through mode effect is finished) is included in the fluctuation pattern command and transmitted. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, it reads the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the variation pattern command and grasps the remaining number of variations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. In particular, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 does not have the stored contents backed up, so if the power is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect is controlled by the voice lamp control after power recovery. It becomes impossible for the device 113 side to grasp.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the information corresponding to the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output to the voice lamp control device 113, the door break-through mode effect is produced. Even if the power is cut off during execution and the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are cleared, after the power is restored, the variation pattern command that is received first is analyzed to execute the door breakthrough mode effect. Whether or not it is in progress and its progress can be grasped. As a result, even when the power is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect can be resumed from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode effect after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect contents from being changed before and after the power is cut off, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect contents.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a state transition method according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, three kinds of states, that is, a normal mode, a door breakthrough mode, and a probability variation mode are exchanged. In the second embodiment, the content of the door breakthrough mode is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the above-described first embodiment is a state in which the special symbol is changed to a certain degree, and is a time saving state of the normal symbol, and only the state in which the holding ball of the second special symbol exists is shown. In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the low probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol, the state in which there is a holding ball of the second special symbol is also the door breakthrough mode. Hereinafter, for simplification of the description, the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the door breakthrough mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, is called the door breakthrough mode 1, a low probability state of the special symbol, and The door breakthrough mode in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is referred to as the door breakthrough mode 2. The door breakthrough mode 1 is illustrated on the left side of the middle stage in FIG. 71, and the door breakthrough mode 2 is illustrated on the left side of the middle stage in FIG. 71.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode always shifts to the door breakthrough mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (maximum 30 seconds) in each round of the big winning, so aiming at the specific winning opening 650a in order to obtain a prize ball. When the ball is launched, a large amount of the ball also enters the second entrance 640. As a result, at the end of the big hit, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit value, and after the big hit, the door break mode (door break mode 1) is set.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough modes 1 and 2), basically, the jackpot is the lottery for the second special symbol, or the lottery for the second special symbol is all out 2 When the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes 0, there is a possibility of shifting to another state. The state of the transition destination when it is a big hit is common to the door breakthrough modes 1 and 2, but the state of the transition destination when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 is the door breakthrough mode 1 It is different from Door Breakthrough Mode 2. Specifically, in the door breakthrough mode 1, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the probability variation mode (see the middle left side of FIG. 71). In the probability variation mode, by performing left-handing, it is possible to execute only the lottery of the first special symbol advantageous to the player, and the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol increases (for small hits) Because the winning opening 655a is easily opened), the game can be continued until the big hit of the first special symbol is achieved without almost reducing the number of balls. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the door breakthrough mode 2, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 71). In the normal mode, the small hit probability is low, so if you hit left to execute the lottery for the first special symbol, the number of balls you have will continue to decrease until you hit the big prize, which is a disadvantage for the player compared to the probability variation mode. Become.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode, when the jackpot E2 is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, after the jackpot is over, the number of continuous probability variation states has not reached the upper limit. Transition to probability variation mode (common to door breakthrough modes 1 and 2). As described above, the jackpot E2 has a short opening time of the specific winning opening 650a (0.2 seconds), and cannot win a prize ball even if the player hits the ball right. Also, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, left hitting is informed during the big hit E2 and the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, unless the player deliberately hits right against the notification, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are not accumulated during the execution of the jackpot E2. Therefore, after the jackpot E2 ends, the mode directly shifts to the probability variation mode. To do. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa which counts the number of continuous remaining probability variation states before the shift to the normal mode. Therefore, when the jackpot E2 is reached, no prize ball can be obtained, and the number of probable variation states is subtracted, resulting in an unfavorable result for the player. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds a plurality of times in the door breakthrough mode, the player wants all the opening operations to be a small hit of the second special symbol. It is possible to realize a novel gameplay that makes you wish.

  Further, in the door breakthrough mode, the jackpot E2 of the second special symbol, and the probability variation limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (when the continuous number of the probability variation state reaches the upper limit value), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Since it is not possible, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect of failing to break through the door is executed to notify the shift to the normal mode.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 71, when the jackpot D2 is won in the door breakthrough mode, the door breakthrough mode (either the door breakthrough mode 1 or the door breakthrough mode 2) is re-executed after the jackpot D2 ends. Transition to. More specifically, if the number of continuous in the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit, the door breakthrough mode 1 (the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, and the number of consecutive occurrences of the probability variation state is in the upper limit. If it has reached, the door breakthrough mode 2 (low probability state of special symbol, and normal state of normal symbol) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, it is possible for the player to move to the probability variation mode unless a big hit occurs with the holding ball of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the door break-through mode 2 is set, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), it falls to the normal mode, so it is more advantageous to be a big hit .

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability variation mode, when a special symbol jackpot is hit, the game state shifts to another gaming state. Specifically, if the first special symbol is a big jackpot, and the number of consecutive probability variation states has not reached the upper limit value (the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the jackpot is over. . On the other hand, when the number of continuous probability variation states has reached the upper limit (the probability variation limit counter 203aa has reached 0), the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of continuous probability variation states has reached the upper limit during the big hit. That is, the effect of notifying that the state after the jackpot is the normal mode is executed, for example, in the ending period of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode, the winning ball can be won with a high probability (95%, which is the rate at which the jackpot E2 is determined). Instead, the remaining continuous number of the probability variation state (value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) is subtracted, which is an unfavorable result for the player. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, a game can be played in the hope that the second special symbol will not be a big hit.

  In the door breakthrough mode effect of the second embodiment, if the jackpot E2 is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the effect of failing to break through the door is temporarily executed (see FIG. 10A). It If the number of continuous probability variation states does not reach the upper limit value (the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0), the adventurer 811 again tries to break through the door as a result of so-called revival, and as a result, breaks through the door. The production that succeeds in is executed. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is selected by the lottery and the jackpot E2 is reached and the continuous number of the probability variation state reaches the upper limit value, the revival effect is not performed, and the process directly shifts to the normal mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the remaining number of consecutive times has decreased even when the revival effect is accompanied even when the mode changes to the probability variation mode.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the probability variation mode, the state shifts to another state only when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit. Specifically, it is a big hit for the first special symbol, and if the number of consecutive probabilities in the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit, it shifts to door breakthrough mode 1 after the jackpot and the number of consecutive probabilities in the probability variation state has reached the upper limit number. In this case, after the big hit ends, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode 2.

  In addition, when it becomes the door breakthrough mode 2, as a door breakthrough mode effect, when the holding balls of all the second special symbols are out (small hit), the breakthrough of the door fails and the normal mode is entered. The effect of notifying the shift is executed. That is, the effect that is the opposite of the door break-through mode 1 (and the door break-through mode effect in the first embodiment) is executed. Further, in the case of the big hit E2 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the probability change mode is informed through the revival effect, as in the case where the remaining number of continuous probability change states in the door breakthrough mode 1 remains.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, in a state where the number of continuous probability variation states has not reached the upper limit, the door break-through mode 1 that shifts when one of the big hits A2 to D2 is reached, and a state where the number of continuous probability variation states reaches the upper limit (limit). The door break-through mode 2 is provided, which shifts when one of the big hits A2 to D2. Door break-through mode 1, as in the first embodiment, because the transition to the probability variation mode, which is advantageous for the player when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol have come off (small hit), the second special symbol It is more advantageous not to get a jackpot in the lottery. On the other hand, the door break-through mode 2 is a low probability state of a special symbol internally, and is a normal state of a normal symbol, and is a state in which the upper limit of the number of continuous succession in the probability variation state is reset. Therefore, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. In this case, since it is a big hit of the second special symbol during the door breakthrough mode 2, it is possible to shift to the door breakthrough mode 1 or the probability variation mode. It is more advantageous for the player. In the door breakthrough mode 2, all the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol come off (small hit), and if it shifts to the normal mode, there is a possibility that a lot of balls will be consumed before it becomes a big hit. Is.

  Depending on the type of the door breakthrough mode, it may be advantageous that all the reserved balls of the second special symbol have an advantage, or it may be advantageous that the jackpot is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the door breakthrough mode is entered, it is possible to predict which mode the current door breakthrough mode is. Then, according to the predicted mode type, it is possible to expect a deviation or a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20B) in that a post-input flag 223i is added. is doing. Other configurations are similar to those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The after-insertion flag 223i is a flag that indicates that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during execution of the door break-through mode, the door break-through mode is set to the middle stage, and then the power is turned on again to restart the door break-through mode. Is. This post-insertion flag 223i is set to ON when the door break-through mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and when it is determined that the change is other than the last change in the door break-through mode effect. (See S5102 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 73 to 79. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73, details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, in each process of S301 to S309, and S311, S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S311 is executed.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value is read. And a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in S307 or S309 (S322).

  Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 after the process of S311 is completed (S323). In the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is larger than 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is decremented by 1. Then (S324), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped, This processing is ended as it is.

  By this special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab) can be included in the change pattern command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the remaining number of actual door breakthrough mode effects from deviating from the effect mode executed by the voice lamp control device 113. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, the stored contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are all cleared, so that the situation of the door breakthrough mode effect before the power is cut off is also affected by the voice lamp. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the variation pattern command is configured to include the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab, it is possible to easily analyze the variation pattern command that is output first after the power is restored, before the power is turned off. The state of can be grasped on the side of the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the presentation mode before the power is cut off.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the situation in which the holding ball of the second special symbol exists is basically only during the big hit and during the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, it seems that it is sufficient to determine that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the jackpot is not in the midst of a big hit. However, even when the player intentionally or mistakenly right-hands in the normal time, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may be 1 or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, the number of holding balls is notified that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, so that the voice lamp control device 113 has a door There is a problem that it is mistakenly recognized that the breakthrough mode performance is being executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the progress status of the door breakthrough mode effect is included in the variation pattern command and output, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more when the power is restored, It is possible to know whether the door breakthrough mode is being executed, or whether the player has intentionally or mistakenly made a right-handed stroke in normal time. Therefore, the presentation mode after the power is restored can be accurately returned to the state before the power was shut off.

  In the second embodiment, the number of changes until the door break-through mode effect is finished is grasped by the break-through mode counter 203ab and is output in the change pattern command. The configuration may be such that only the information on whether or not it is being executed is included in the variation pattern command and output. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 side may be configured to grasp the number of fluctuations until the door break-through mode effect ends based on the information and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the processing of updating the door break-through mode counter 203ab can be omitted on the main control device 110 side, and thus the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

  Of the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in each process of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623, the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as the processes of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the present is a normal symbol time saving state (S614: Yes), variation of the normal symbol The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S614, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this processing is ended.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second entering ball The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b associated with the mouth 640 are set to “1 second × 2 times” (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the current time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the opening time and the opening number of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640 are It is set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the normal state of the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state of the regular symbol, and the open time when the normal symbol is hit is shorter than the normal state of the normal symbol. It is configured to be long. Further, as described above, the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state) and the high probability state of the normal symbol and the normal symbol hits. The number of judgment values to be judged is different by one. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting is almost equal to that of the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the ball in the second symbol entrance 640 is the ball in the time saving state of the normal symbol as a whole. It will be difficult. Therefore, in the probability variation mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, which is a disadvantageous second special symbol. It is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed in a situation other than the situation where the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during a big hit that is set to a low probability state of a normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a startup process 2 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. The startup process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, instead of the startup process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

  Of the start-up processing 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, S901 to S910 and S913 are respectively the start-up processing (see FIG. 35) S901 to S910 and S913 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of is executed. Further, in the startup process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, a state command setting process for setting a state command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. Details of the status command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S921). In this state command setting process (S921), first, the probability variation flag 203g is read (S1801), and the state command is set based on the read state of the probability variation flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1803), and if it is changing (S1803: Yes), the data of the execution area and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read (S1804). . Next, the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab is read (S1805), and the variation pattern command is set based on the read values (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), the processes of S1804 to S1807 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

  By executing this state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is cut off, the progress state of the door breakthrough mode effect, etc. are voiced in the startup process 2 (see FIG. 75). The lamp control device 113 can be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. This big hit control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the big hit control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

  Of the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S1107 to S1109 is executed.

  In addition, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. The state is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this processing is ended. In the second embodiment, a variable winning device 650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharge passage 65e1 and the special discharge passage 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77), it is not necessary to execute the process of switching the flow paths, and therefore these processes (S1202 and S1203 in FIG. 38) are deleted.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the jackpot end timing (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process in the first embodiment ( Instead of (see S1110 of FIG. 37), the jackpot end process 2 is executed (S1123), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), the winning processing 2 is executed instead of the winning processing (see S1111 of FIG. 37) in the first embodiment (S1124). ), And this processing ends. Details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

  The jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment does not include a process corresponding to the abnormality process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability variation state after the jackpot is determined depending on whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in the variable winning a prize device 65. This is because there is a difference in that the gaming state after the big hit is determined according to the big hit type in the second embodiment. Therefore, in the second embodiment, even if the ball is left inside the variable winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not it is in a probable state, and it is an illegal act to keep the ball inside. It does not hold itself. Therefore, the second embodiment has a configuration in which the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not an abnormality in which a sphere remains inside the variable winning device 650 is deleted.

  In the second embodiment as well, it is of course possible to execute a process corresponding to the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Accordingly, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 650, the error can be notified at an early stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1123) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end processing 2 (S1123). In this jackpot end process 2 (S1123), first, the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1311), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after decrement becomes 0.

  In the processing of S1311, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of continuous probability variation states has not reached the upper limit value (limit). 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, in the processing of S1311, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after the subtraction becomes 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of continuous probability variation states reaches the upper limit value. , Without turning on the probability variation flag 203g (while keeping the probability variation flag 203g off), the probability variation limit counter 203aa is set to 4 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315. .

  In the processing of S1315 that is executed after the processing of S1313 or S1314 is completed, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. (S1316). Then, a state command is set based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa (S1317). By including the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa in the state command, not only the gaming state after the big hit, but also the remaining number of times until the continuous number of the probability variation state reaches the upper limit (limit) is grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to. When the process of S1317 ends, the big hit medium flag 203r is set to OFF (S1318), and the present process ends.

  Next, details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. As described above, the winning process 2 (S1124) is a process executed instead of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

  Of the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, in S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408, S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1408 to S1408 is performed.

  Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1404 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431), and the winning number counter. If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1431, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

  Further, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1409 to S1420 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, and for determining whether or not the sphere has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 at a normal timing. This is because the process is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in which the discharge passage 65e2, the probability change switch 65e3, etc. are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 80 to 84. First, with reference to FIG. 80, a startup process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The startup process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process that is executed instead of the startup process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  Of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, the respective processes of S4001 to S4013 are the same as the respective processes of S4001 to S4013 of the startup process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the startup process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4012 ends, the state at power-on based on the state command and the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is then next. An on-state determination process for determining is performed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4013. Details of the closing state determination process (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this state determination process (S4021) at the time of closing. In the closing state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S4901), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S4901: No). The back image corresponding to the game state when the power is turned on is set (S4902), and the process is finished. Here, the game state when the power is turned on is determined based on the data of the game state storage area 223h updated in the process of S4012 of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 80), and if the current state is the probability change state. The back image for the probability variation state is set, and if it is the normal state, the back image for the normal state is set. Since the door breakthrough mode effect is an effect that is executed during the change of the second special symbol, there is no possibility of the door breakthrough mode when the power is turned on and the change is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S4901: Yes), the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S4903). ), It is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the break-through mode counter 203ab is 0, it means that the door break-through mode effect is not being executed. If the value in the break-through mode counter 203ab is 1 or more, it means that the door break-through mode effect is being executed. means.

  In the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect. The mode selection process is executed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. Details of the breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the residual fluctuation An effect mode is determined according to the time and the lottery result (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the process of S4907, the display variation pattern command is set based on the effect mode determined in the process of S4905 or S4906 (S4907), and the present process ends.

  Next, the details of the breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this breakthrough mode selection processing (S4905).

  In the breakthrough mode selection processing (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 If there is (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a deviation (S5002). In the process of S5002, when it is determined that the variation pattern is out of alignment (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is a data indicating a probable variation state (S5003). If the probability change state (S5003: Yes), the power is cut off during execution of the variable display based on the last reserved ball of the second special symbol in the door breakthrough mode 1 (see the middle left side of FIG. 71), and the execution It means that the last reserved ball inside was out (small hit). Therefore, in this case, an effect mode for notifying the transition to the probability variation mode is determined as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining variation time (S5004), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5003, when it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is the data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door break mode 2 (the middle stage of FIG. 71) It means that the power supply was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last second special symbol holding ball in the right side), and the last holding ball being executed was out (small hit). Therefore, in this case, the production mode for notifying the shift to the normal mode is determined as the production mode to be executed in the remaining variation time (S5004), and this processing is ended. By the processes of S5003 and S5004, even when the state at the time when the power is turned on again is the execution of the last variable display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is determined based on the lottery result and the game state. The result of the breakthrough mode effect can be accurately notified.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is not 1 (2 or more) (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 When it is determined that the variation pattern being executed when the power is restored is the variation pattern of the jackpot (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern of this time is the jackpot E2 (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the big hit is E2 (S5006: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of continuous probability variation states reaches the upper limit (limit) (S5007). In addition, the remaining number up to the upper limit value of the number of continuous probability variation states is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a state command together with the game state when the power is turned on.

  In the processing of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit value (limit) of the number of continuous probability variation states has been reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the big hit is the normal mode, and therefore the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process shifts to the process of S5005 described above. On the other hand, in the processing of S5007, when it is determined that the upper limit value (limit) of the number of continuous probability variation states has not been reached, the state after the big hit is the probability variation mode, and the door is successfully broken through the revival effect. The effect mode is determined (S5008), and this processing ends. As described above, in this revival production, the number of remaining times up to the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous probability change states is reduced due to the jackpot E2, even though the prize ball cannot be obtained. It is an effect shown. This revival effect allows the player to recognize that the jackpot E2 has been won during the door breakthrough mode effect.

  In addition, in the processing of S5006, when it is determined that it is not the big hit E2 (S5006: No), it is then determined whether the current variation pattern is the big hit D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the variation pattern of this time is the jackpot D2 (S5009: Yes), it is determined as a special effect mode indicating that the player has hit the door in the breakthrough mode effect (S5010). , This process ends.

  In addition, in the processing of S5009, when it is determined that the variation pattern of this time is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the variation pattern of this time is a variation pattern corresponding to deviation (small hit), and the variation of this time is Means that it is not the last change in the door breakthrough mode, and therefore, the effect mode of the breakthrough effect according to the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is determined (S5011). That is, the mode of the door 814 is determined according to the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab. Then, the value of the extracted break-through mode counter 203ab is set to the break-through effect counter 223g, the post-insertion flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and this processing is ended. By turning on the post-power-on flag 223i, it is possible to determine that the performance has been restarted from the middle of the door break-through mode when the power is turned on, even when the next and subsequent fluctuation patterns are received.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, the door break-through mode effect in the second embodiment is basically 5.8 seconds from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the fourth opening of the specific winning opening 650a. A series of productions for the production time is set. That is, at the start of the door breakthrough mode effect, the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is determined in advance based on the look-ahead result of each of the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, when a variation pattern command of the second special symbol is newly received, it is only necessary to execute a predetermined effect mode as it is. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is cleared, resulting in the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect and the result of the effect. It becomes impossible to grasp the information. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the power is turned on again, the fact can be grasped by the post-input flag 223i. Then, while the post-insertion flag 223i is ON, every time the fluctuation pattern command is received, the door break-through mode is determined based on the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab included in the fluctuation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect and set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the voice lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. Of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment, in S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809, S4801 to S4803 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S4805-S4809 is performed.

  Further, in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 is completed, then, the rough variable display mode notified by the variable pattern command output from the main controller 110 ( Based on the (variation time), a variation pattern determination process for determining a detailed production mode of the variation pattern is executed (S4811). Details of this fluctuation pattern determination processing (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4811 is completed, the display variation pattern command is set based on the detailed rendering mode of the variation pattern determined in the process of S4811 (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4805.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination processing (S4811) will be described. In the fluctuation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the post-input flag 223i is on (S5101), and if the post-input flag 223i is off (S5101: No), the main control device 110 determines Based on the rough aspect of the variation pattern extracted from the output variation pattern command, the detailed production aspect of the variation pattern is determined (S5102), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the post-power-on flag 223i is on (S5101: Yes), the power is turned off after the power is turned off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and then the power is turned on again. This means that the processing for determining the effect mode during the door breakthrough mode effect is executed according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the lottery result.

  Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S5103), and whether the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the last fluctuation in the door breakthrough mode effect). It is determined (S5104). In the process of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the extracted break-through mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), it is then determined whether the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is a deviation fluctuation pattern. If it is determined (S5105) and the variation pattern is out of alignment (S5105: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the probable variation state based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h. (S5106).

  In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently in the probability variation state (S5106: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 10 (b)) for notifying the transition to the probability variation mode is determined, and the process is performed. The procedure moves to S5116. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently in the low probability state (S5106: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 10A) for notifying the shift to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5104, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), and when it is determined that the jackpot variation pattern is notified (S5105: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is E2 (S5109).

  In the processing of S5109, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous probability variation states is reached. If (S5110) and the upper limit (limit) of the continuous number of times is reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the jackpot E2 is finished cannot be set to the probable variation mode, so a notification of the transition to the normal mode is issued. The process moves to S5108 for determining the effect mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5110, if it is determined that the number of continuous probability variation states has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect mode of the revival effect is determined (S5111), and the present process ends. To do.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5109, when it is determined that the variation pattern of this time is not the jackpot E2 (S5109: No), then it is determined whether the variation pattern of this time is the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot D2. (S5112), if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the big hit D2 (S5112: Yes), the effect mode of the special door breakthrough mode effect for notifying the big hit is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. And transition.

  In addition, in the processing of S5112, when it is determined that it is not the big hit D2 (S5112: No), the fluctuation pattern of this time is a deviation (small hit) fluctuation pattern, and the remaining number of fluctuations of the door breakthrough mode effect ( Since it means that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 2 or more, the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 is determined (S5114). The value of the extracted break-through mode counter 203ab is set in the break-through effect counter 223g (S5115), and this processing ends.

  In addition, in the process of S5116 that is executed after any of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 ends, the post-input flag 223i is reset to OFF and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( (S5116), and this processing ends.

  By executing this variation pattern determination process, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect, after the power is turned on again, the effect is generated from the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect. The mode can be restored. More specifically, when the power is cut off during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is cleared, so that the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect, the result of the effect, etc. are grasped. I can not do it. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect and the power is turned on again, the fact can be grasped by the post-input flag 223i. Then, while the post-insertion flag 223i is ON, every time the fluctuation pattern command is received, the door break-through mode is determined based on the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab included in the fluctuation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the effect and set the effect mode according to the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the voice lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is set in advance for each jackpot type. In addition, the upper limit (limit) is set to the number of consecutive probability changes in the special symbol, and when the upper limit is reached, even after the probability change jackpot is won, after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. I am configuring. By configuring in this way, it is possible to form two types of a door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) in which the special symbol is in a probable change state and a door breakthrough mode in which the special symbol is in a low probability state. it can. Therefore, in the case of shifting to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode even if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are released. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which it is advantageous or disadvantageous to have a big hit during the door breakthrough mode, depending on the number of continuous probability change states.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided to the second entrance 640, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b is difficult to be opened, In the normal state (low probability state) of the design, the electric accessory 640b is configured to be easily opened. With this configuration, in the probability variation mode in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. , It is possible to prevent the disadvantageous second special symbol lottery from being executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed in a situation other than the situation where the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, which is excessively disadvantageous to the player. In addition, during a big hit that is set to a low probability state of a normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to easily store the reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the big hit. .

  Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 is information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab). It is configured to include. As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect, the voice pattern controller 113 outputs the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 after the power is turned on again. Only by the side analysis, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, and the progress status when it is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect on the voice lamp control device 113 side while minimizing the information output from the main control device 110.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern command is output by including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab so that whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is restored is controlled by the voice lamp. Although the device 113 is configured to be discriminable, the invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to include only the information on whether or not the second special symbol after holding the jackpot is being held in the variation pattern command. That is, it is not necessary to include the information of the remaining number of times of change display until the door breakthrough mode effect is finished in the change pattern. Then, when the power is restored during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the number of holding balls of the second special symbol and the type of variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command (whether winning or not) Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is the last change in the door breakthrough mode effect. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the second embodiment, the variable pattern command is always output by including the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, only the first variation pattern command may be output including the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab. As a result, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output, but it need not be included in the variation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab may be separately prepared. That is, the main controller 110 may notify the voice lamp controller 113 by a command only when the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab is changed. With this configuration, the data amount of the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the state of the game is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command when the power is turned on, and the value of the break-through mode counter 203ab is notified by the variation pattern command. However, the voice lamp is turned on when the power is turned on. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading result of each reserved ball may be notified again by the winning information command. With this configuration, not only the fact that the door break-through mode effect is being executed when the door break-through mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on, but also the result of the door break-through mode effect is obtained. It can be grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 side when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to determine the presentation mode in consideration of the result of the presentation.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, the electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640. And, the change time of the normal symbol is shorter in the low probability state of the normal symbol than in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b is long when the normal symbol is a hit. Thus, the sphere is prevented (suppressed) from entering the second entrance 640 in the probability variation mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, a storage valve 63a capable of storing (stopping) the sphere in the upper part, and the sphere stored in the storage valve 63a. There is provided a general winning opening 63 into which the stored ball can enter when the stored state is released. Although the details will be described later, the second ball entrance 640 in the present modification is basically provided at a position where the ball cannot be entered (difficult) even if the player hits the ball to the right. As an exception, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 only when the ball is hit right with three balls stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when right-handing is performed in a state where three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, the third ball that has been stored collides with the ball that has flowed down by right-handing. The trajectory of the sphere may be changed so that the trajectory can enter the second entrance 640. In this modification, the storage state is released during normal operation and the storage state is set only during the big hit, so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 only during the big hit. .

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to attach the electric accessory 640b to the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the electric accessory 64a can be attached to the first ball inlet 64. Thus, similarly to the first embodiment, in the probability variation mode, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he holds. In addition, by having the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball inlet 64, "a low probability state of a special symbol" and "a time saving state of a normal symbol" are set in the above embodiments. A game state that was not present can be provided. More specifically, the gaming state when the number of consecutive times in the probability variation state reaches the upper limit (limit), the "low probability state of the special symbol", and the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the probability variation mode After the end (after reaching the limit), for a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times), a state where the special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the ball (so-called) The pullback state) can be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game after the probability variation mode ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Hereinafter, for simplification of the description, "low probability state of special symbol", and, "normal time saving state" will be referred to as "pullback mode".

  First, with reference to FIG. 85, a game board 13 in a modification of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present modification, the electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, in the "probability change mode" and the "pullback mode" in which the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily inserted into the first entrance 64. Therefore, in this modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, it is configured so as not to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In addition to the second winning opening 640 and the variable winning device 650, a general winning opening 63 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable winning device unit 80. The general winning opening 63 is configured as a winning opening through which one prize ball is paid out when a ball is entered. A storage valve 63a is provided vertically above the general winning opening 63. This storage valve 63a can be changed between a protruding state in which it is projected to the front side in front view (see FIG. 86 (a)) and a buried state in which it is buried inside the game board 13 (see FIG. 86 (b)). It is configured. In the protruding state of the storage valve 63a, by storing (stopping) the ball on the upper portion thereof, it is possible to prevent the ball that has reached the storage valve 63a from flowing down to the general winning opening 63. On the other hand, when the storage valve 63a is buried, the ball can pass in front of the storage valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general winning opening 63. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86, in the present modification, the storage valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) during normal times other than during the big hit, and the storage valve 63a is started at the start of the big hit. Is changed from the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)) to the projecting state (see FIG. 86 (a)). Then, at the end of the big hit, the storage valve 63a is changed again from the protruding state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the buried state (see FIG. 86 (b)).

  The protruding state and the buried state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the storage valve 63a is in the protruding state with the start of the big hit, the flow passage formed above the general winning opening 63 is closed by the storage valve 63a. As a result, the spheres that have reached the flow path are stored (stopped) above the storage valve 63a with a limit of three. It should be noted that during the big hit, the player cannot get the prize ball unless he or she wins the ball into the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, during the big hit, the player almost right-hands. In the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63, nails, windmills, etc. are arranged so that one out of two balls fired by a right hit may advance. Therefore, in one round of almost a big hit, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the upper limit number of three balls is stored above the storage valve 63a, when the ball is further hit to the right, the right hit ball is , The third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a may collide. The sphere colliding with the stored third sphere is reflected in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction so far, and as a result, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the sphere enters the general winning opening 63. On the other hand, the trajectory becomes a trajectory that can enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modification of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a enters the storage state based on the big hit, and the storage state is held until the end of the big hit. Therefore, when the player hits the ball right into the specific winning opening 650a during the big hit and hits right, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. When three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a and the player further hits right to obtain a prize ball, the newly launched ball collides with the stored ball. As a result of the flow direction being varied, the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, the player keeps hitting right while trying to win the prize ball during the big hit, and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) at the end of the big hit. You can Although illustration is omitted, in the state where the three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, a part of the balls fired by the right hit does not collide (interfere) with the stored balls. It flows down in the direction of the specific winning opening 650a. Thereby, a ball can be inserted into the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 650a during the big hit.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As described above, when the big hit ends, the projecting state is changed to this buried state, and the buried state is maintained (held) until the next big hit. When the storage valve 63a is buried, the sphere can pass (flow down) through the flow path provided above the general winning opening 63. Therefore, the sphere fired to the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the front side of the storage valve 63a in the buried state and enters the general winning opening 63, or It flows down the flow path toward the specific winning opening 650a, which is provided between the winning opening 63 and the second winning opening 640. In the present modification, since the storage valve 63a is buried until the next big hit is reached, the ball hit to the right in the normal state enters the second entrance 640. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous at the time of normal operation, from being executed, and thus it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being too disadvantageous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a state transition method in this modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, probability variation mode, door breakthrough mode 1, door breakthrough mode 2) provided in the above-described second embodiment, the pullback mode is It is provided.

  The pullback mode is a low probability state of a special symbol, and a state in which a time saving state of a normal symbol is set. In this modified example, when the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous succession in the probability changing state is reached, the state after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, in this modification, the door breakthrough mode 2 is a low probability state of the special symbol, and is a time saving state of the normal symbol, and when the holding ball of the second special symbol is 0 in the door breakthrough mode 2, the pullback mode is set. .

  As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pullback mode is a big hit, or when the lottery of special symbols for the number of time saving (25 times) set without being a big hit is completed, it shifts to another mode. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when the lottery for special symbols for the number of times saved is all missed, the mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, in the pullback mode, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is reset, so that when the jackpot in the first special symbol is a big hit, the door breakthrough mode 1 is entered. .

  In this modification, the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is easily opened in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the opening control of the electric accessory 64a is the same in both the probability variation mode and the pullback mode, it is difficult to visually determine whether it is the probability variation mode or the pullback mode. In the present modification, the player can recognize that the player has been in the pullback mode when the number of hours saved has ended and the pullback mode has fallen to the normal mode. In other words, in the pullback mode, when the jackpot in the first special symbol is a jackpot, it is difficult to understand whether the jackpot in the probability variation mode or the jackpot in the pullback mode. Therefore, by making a big hit in the pullback mode, it is possible to make the player feel as if the probability variation state continues beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability variation states. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, with the configuration in which the probability variation mode and the pullback mode cannot be discriminated from the operation of the electric accessory 64a and the like, in the present modification, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed in the door breakthrough mode 2. Also in this case, an effect that successfully breaks through the door is executed. As a result, when the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through all the doors in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door breakthrough mode 1 shifts to the probability variation mode, or the door breakthrough mode 2 shifts to the pullback mode. It is possible to make it difficult to understand if it has been migrated. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which it is not known how long the jackpot and the mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (probability variation mode or pullback mode) continue.

  As described above, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the sphere can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a, and the right-handed sphere is stored depending on whether or not the sphere is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a. It is configured so that the direction in which the water flows down can be switched. When the balls are not stored in the storage valve 63a, it becomes difficult for the balls to enter the second ball inlet 640, while the upper limit number (3) of balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. In the case where the ball is stored, the flow direction of a part of the newly launched sphere is switched by the stored sphere, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory capable of entering the second entrance 640. did. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 even when the player hits the ball right when the storage valve 63a is normally set in the buried state. Further, during the big hit when the storage valve 63a is set to the protruding state, the ball can be configured to be able to enter the second entrance port 640 when a right hit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit at the end of the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player at the normal time, from being executed.

  Further, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the number of continuous probability variation states is the upper limit, a special symbol time saving state that continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. It has a configuration. By configuring in this way, when the number of consecutive probability change states reaches the upper limit, the special symbol lottery is drawn without reducing the number of balls held until a predetermined number (25 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed. Can be formed (pullback mode). Therefore, even if the number of continuous probability change states reaches the upper limit and the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, the pullback mode and the probability variation mode are both set to the normal symbol time saving state, so that it is difficult to distinguish them from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, even when the jackpot is hit in the pullback mode, the player can be made to think as if the jackpot was hit in the probability variation mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which it is possible to make the user feel as if the probability variation state continues beyond the upper limit of the probability variation state.

  In the modified example of the second embodiment, the storage valve 63a is provided above the general winning opening 63, and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 depending on the state of the storage valve 63a. The configuration is such that the state in which the ball can enter the ball is switched, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general winning opening 63, the storage valve 63a may be provided above the second winning opening 640. While the jackpot is set during the jackpot, the right-handed ball is allowed to enter the second ball inlet 640, while the reservoir valve 63a is set in the buried state. A ball may be difficult to enter the second ball inlet 640 by leaving the valve 63a in a protruding state. As a result, the general winning opening 63 can be omitted, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the modified example of the second embodiment, the upper limit is set for the number of consecutive probability variation states, but instead of this, the upper limit may be set for the number of times the special symbol is drawn in one probability variation state. That is, when the probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot, for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times, the probability variation state of the special symbol may be continued. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous probability change states has been reached, and thus the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Further, in this case, when the jackpot of the first special symbol, the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, while if the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, With a high probability (for example, a rate of 95%), a prize ball can hardly be obtained, and the jackpot type that transitions to a special symbol probability change state after a jackpot and a normal symbol normal state may be determined. .. With such a configuration, similar to each of the above-described embodiments, a novel game property is realized in which a game is carried out in the hope that a big win does not occur in a lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the big hit. be able to.

  In each of the above-described embodiments and its modified examples, did the process shift to a disadvantageous state (normal mode) until all lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot were completed? Although it is configured to notify whether or not it is through the door breakthrough mode, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether or not the ball is a reserved ball of the second special symbol, after the jackpot, whether or not it has transitioned to a disadvantageous state (or advantageous) within a predetermined number of special symbol lottery, the door It may be configured to notify by the breakthrough mode effect. Specifically, for example, in the probability change state of the special symbol, every time it is time to perform a lottery for the special symbol, apart from the lottery for the special symbol, a transition (fall) to a low-probability state without a big hit By applying the door breakthrough mode effect to the pachinko machine 10 of the specification (specification in which it is advantageous not to obtain the lottery result corresponding to the fall) to perform the lottery whether or not the lottery has a predetermined probability (for example, the fall probability 1/100) Good. That is, in the case of a big hit that shifts to the probability changing state, for example, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed until the special symbol lottery 100 times after the big hit ends. And if it falls to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times, the effect of failing to break through the door is executed, and if it has not fallen, the effect of succeeding to break through the door may be executed. . In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which the number of times the probability variation state is set is limited to a predetermined number (for example, after a big hit, 130 times), the jackpot is a big hit within the range of the number of times the lottery number is set. Alternatively, the door breakthrough mode effect may be used to indicate (notify) whether the probability change state has ended. More specifically, when a jackpot is hit during the probability change state, it is suggested that the player has an advantage (execution is performed to successfully break through the door), and a predetermined number of times (130 When the lottery of (time) has ended, it may be configured to suggest that it has become a disadvantage to the player (execute an effect that fails to break through the door). Furthermore, in this case, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed over the entire period in which the probability variation state is set, or for some periods (for example, the number of lottery after jackpot is 125 or more). Only, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed.

  Further, for example, as a gaming state after the big hit, the probability variation state of the special symbol until the next big hit, and the jackpot type (big hit a) that becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (for example, In the pachinko machine 10 of the specification where at least the special symbol low probability state until the end, and the jackpot type (jackpot b) that is set to the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol are provided at least, the winning jackpot is Whether or not it is a jackpot a or a jackpot b is configured to be indistinguishable (difficult) from the production and the like, and after the jackpot, until a predetermined number (100 times) of lottery is executed, It may be configured to notify the game state set after the last big hit by the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, if the game state is a special symbol probability change state, and if the normal symbol is a time saving state, it is configured to execute an effect (an effect that breaks through the door) suggesting that it is advantageous for the player, and the game state If the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it may be configured to execute an effect (an effect that fails to break through the door) suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state. In addition, for example, in a special symbol lottery, a small hit occurs with a lower probability than a deviation, and when a certain probability variation big hit (big hit c) is determined, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is equivalent to the small hit ( The door break-through mode effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 of the same specification or the specification in which the player has only a difference that is indistinguishable. That is, it is difficult to determine which lottery result is obtained depending on the effect and the operation of the specific winning opening 65a depending on whether the small hit or the big hit c occurs. Then, for example, in a low probability state of a special symbol, after a small hit or a big hit c, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) special symbol lottery is performed, and then the state is notified by the door breakthrough mode effect. May be That is, if the small probability is maintained and the low probability state of the special symbol is maintained, an effect (an effect that fails to break through the door) suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state is executed, and the big hit c is achieved. If the special symbol has transitioned to the probability changing state, it may be configured to execute an effect (an effect that succeeds in breaking through the door) suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the door break-through mode effect is used to notify whether or not it is in an advantageous state (mode), but the content notified (suggested) in the door break-through mode effect is not necessarily limited to the mode. . For example, the door break-through mode effect may be used to notify whether or not the effect mode is changed. More specifically, for example, the door break-through mode presentation may be used to notify whether or not the reach production with high reliability will be developed, whether or not the next step will be developed in a so-called continuous production, and the like.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the holding balls of the second special symbol are increased to the upper limit number (four) at the end of the big hit, but the number is not limited to after the big hit is ended. Normal state (low probability state of special symbol, and normal state of normal symbol) is applicable if the holding balls of the second special symbol increases to the upper limit number in a different state, for example, the end of the probability variation state When the time or the time saving state ends, the holding ball of the second special symbol may be set to the upper limit value. In addition, for example, a configuration is provided in which a small win is easy (the lottery probability is high or the lottery condition is easily established), and a small win is difficult (the lottery probability is low or the lottery condition is hard to be established). The configuration may be applied to a state where a small hit is likely to occur.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the second winning opening 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13, but the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) is hit during a big hit. Arrangement may be changed to an arbitrary range within a range in which the ball launched toward the direction can enter the second entrance 640. Further, the ball hit toward the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) during the big hit is configured to be difficult to enter the first entrance 64, but the first winning opening 64 is hit during the big hit. The ball may be configured to be able to enter.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and the stop is displayed. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (gaming that makes it more advantageous if there is no holding sequence)
Based on the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction easily enters, and the first discriminating information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The first discriminating information obtaining unit that is obtained and the first discriminating unit that performs the first discriminating process based on the first discriminating information obtained by the first discriminating information acquiring unit are different from the first direction. The second discrimination information based on the second ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the second direction is easy to enter, and the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring, second discrimination means for performing second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means After the second discrimination information is obtained by the method, based on the obtained second discrimination information, Until the second determination is executed, a determination information storage unit that can store the second determination information with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and a position where a game ball shot in the second direction easily enters And a variable ball entrance means that can be varied between a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and a game ball in the variable ball entrance means. The variable admission based on the fact that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the privilege imparting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the player has entered, and the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the means is changed a predetermined number of times in the first state, and a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means is finished, the first game state and its first A second game that is more advantageous to the player than one game state A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a state, and the game state setting means is more than the specific determination result by the first determining means. When the specific determination result is obtained by the second determining means, the ratio of setting the first game state as a game state after the execution of the variable game is higher is higher. A game machine A1 to play.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the first direction easily enters, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first determination unit executes the first determination based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit. The second ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Then, the second discrimination information acquisition means acquires the second discrimination information. The second determination unit executes the second determination based on the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit. After the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. It is stored with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. A variable ball entering means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state is a game ball launched in the second direction. It is located in a position where it is easy to do. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting device based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entering device. The variable game execution means executes the variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the result of the specific determination by the first determining means or the second determining means. . As a game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game executing means, a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state The game state from 1 to 1 is set by the game state setting means. Rather than a specific determination result by the first determination means, a specific determination result by the second determination means is the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game by the gaming state setting means is completed. The ratio to set is higher.

  As a result, when the game ball is shot in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege during execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entering means and the second determination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, the ratio is set to the first game state, which has a lower advantage than the second game state, and is therefore stored during execution of the variable game. In the second discrimination based on the second discrimination information, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in the expectation that the specific discrimination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game property can be realized.

  In the gaming machine A1, a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern as a variable pattern of the variable ball entering means and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entering means than the first variable pattern. Variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, the variable pattern setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means results in the specific determination result, When the ratio of setting the first variable pattern is high and the specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the second judging means, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern is higher than that of the first variable pattern. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entering means, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entering means than the first variable pattern. Is set by the variable pattern setting means. When the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the first determining unit, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the second determining unit, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting unit is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

  As a result, when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discriminating means, the second variable pattern in which the game ball is hard to enter the variable ball entering means is easily set, so that the variable game is being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to more strongly expect that the specific determination result will not be obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information stored in.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, as a variable pattern of the variable ball entering means, a first variable pattern and a game ball in the variable ball entering means rather than the first variable pattern. Is provided with a variable pattern setting means for setting any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that is difficult to enter, and the game ball is in the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern. When the second discrimination information acquiring unit acquires the predetermined number of pieces of the second discrimination information when the second discrimination information is continuously emitted in the second direction, the period is at least longer than the period. A gaming machine A3 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entering means, the first variable pattern and the second variable in which the game ball does not easily enter the variable ball entering means than the first variable pattern. Any of the plurality of variable patterns including at least the pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction, the second determination information acquisition means acquires the second determination information of a predetermined information number. It is at least longer than the time to

  As a result, during execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player continues to shoot the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined privilege, at least a predetermined number of information or more second Discrimination information of is acquired. Therefore, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed every time after the end of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the second determination of the maximum number of times does not result in a specific determination result.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed with priority over the first discrimination by the first discrimination means. Even if a game ball enters the first ball entering means with the second identification information stored in the identification information storage means, execution of the first identification can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that attention can be paid by the second determination.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the first flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the second direction can reach, and the reached game ball is provided with the second ball entering means. And a distribution means for allocating to the second flow path in which the variable ball entering means is provided.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, there is provided a first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a variable ball entry means. Since the distribution means for allocating the game balls is arranged at a position where the game balls emitted in the second direction can reach, it is possible that the flow direction of the game balls emitted in the second direction is biased. The effect is that it can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine A5, the distribution means is for alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, so that the game is executed during the variable game. Balls can be alternately entered into the second ball entry means and the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball shot in the second direction from being biased into the second ball entering means or the variable ball entering means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a first position where a game ball easily enters the first ball entering means and a game ball enters the first ball entering means as compared to the first position. It is provided with variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to hit the ball, and variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means. In the first gaming state, the variable means causes the variable means to change the It is difficult to be changed to one position, and the second game state is easily changed to the first position by the variable control means as compared with the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the gaming ball easily enters the first ball entering means and the first position compared to the first position The variable means changes to the second position where it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, the variable control means makes it difficult for the variable means to be changed to the first position. In the second game state, the variable control means makes it easier to change the variable means to the first position than in the first game state. .

  As a result, in the first game state, the variable means can be easily changed to the first position, and thus the game ball can easily enter the first ball entering means. Therefore, in the first game state, the game can be played more efficiently, and there is an effect that the game can be played while expecting to be in the first game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the first gaming state is set to the first probability with the probability that the specific determination result is determined by the first determining means and the second determining means. Yes, the second game state is set to a second probability that the probability of being the specific determination result by the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means is lower than the first probability. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means is set to the first probability. On the other hand, in the second game state, the probability that the specific determination result by the determination by the first determining unit and the second determining unit is set to the second probability lower than the first probability.

  As a result, in the first game state, the probability of having a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game is finished, the variable game is likely to be executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it is expected that more predetermined benefits will be obtained in a relatively short period of time, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Perform a specific effect by using a jackpot ending period and a holding digestion period)
Discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the privilege thereof. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game by the game executing means is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from the states, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a predetermined one during execution of the privilege game. Based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the period until the bonus game is finished, and the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the bonus game is finished A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a period, and the specific effect can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is finished is the second game state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by a production.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the determination means performs the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the benefit game execution that is advantageous to the player is performed based on that the determination result by the determination means results in a specific determination result. Executed by means. As a game state after the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means, a plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state. The game state of 1 is set from the state by the game state setting means. The identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Dynamic display of a period until the privilege game ends based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the privilege game, and one or more identification information executed after the privilege game ends. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the period until the end. The specific effect is composed of an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is the second game state.

  Thereby, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the satisfaction of the specific condition to the end of the dynamic display of the one or more identification information, so that the special game is simply ended. Or, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1.

  In the gaming machine B1, the specific effect executing means, when the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second game state, the specific effect based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. A gaming machine B2 for executing the game.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the second gaming state, the specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, so long as the specific determination result does not occur during execution of the specific effect and the first game state is not entered, the second game state is suggested in the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played while expecting that a specific determination result will not be obtained during execution of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the discrimination information acquisition unit that acquires the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination unit based on a predetermined specific trigger, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit, Until the determination condition for the obtained determination information is satisfied, the determination information storage unit is capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, and the determination information storage unit stores the determination information based on the determination condition being satisfied. Based on the determination means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information, and the determination result by the determination means, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined. It is characterized by comprising an effect mode determining means, wherein the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means. Game machine B3 to.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means on the basis of a predetermined specific trigger, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is discriminated from the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the predetermined number of pieces of information is stored in the discriminant information storage means with the upper limit. Based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the determination means determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. The effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determination means based on the determination result of the determination means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  With this, the determination result by the determining unit can be determined in advance, so that there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode in accordance with the result of the determination actually performed by the determining unit.

  In the gaming machine B3, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a first privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, The determination means is provided with a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state after execution is finished is set to the second game state. Is for determining whether or not the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game. Based on the determination that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included by the means, a performance state that suggests that the game state after the specific performance is finished is the first game state And characterized in that to determine the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and after the execution is finished. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. The determination means determines whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game. Based on the determination means determining that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a production mode that suggests that the game state after the specific production is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.

  As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, wherein the specific effect is such that a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period regardless of an effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a predetermined specific period is set as the effect period of the specific effect, regardless of the effect mode, so that the effect period is long. This makes it difficult to predict the result of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

  In the gaming machine B5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display. And a dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of identification information based on a determination result by the determining unit, and the specific period is the privilege game after the specific condition is satisfied. The period until the end, and the determination by the dynamic display period determination means when the determination by the determination means of a predetermined number of times is a deviation determination result that is different from the specific determination result. A game machine B6, which is a sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display period determination when the period from the satisfaction of the specific condition to the end of the privilege game and the determination by the determination means of the predetermined number of times all result in a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result The sum of the dynamic display period for the specific number of times determined by the means is set as the specific period.

  Thereby, since the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times is ended, there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended well.

  In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display period determining means, at least until the specific period ends, when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means within the specific number of times after the end of the privilege game. A game machine B7 characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period is determined as the dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B6, at least until the end of the specific period when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means within a specific number of times after the end of the privilege game. Since the period longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, when the specific determination result is determined within the specific number of times, the special game is performed before the specific period ends. It is possible to suppress the start. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific effect from being known in advance by starting the privilege game before the specific effect ends, so that there is an effect that more attention can be paid to the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, an expectation suggesting effect executing means for executing an effect indicating an expectation for the second game state being suggested by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine B8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B7, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the second gaming state is suggested by the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game is an expectation suggesting effect executing means. Since it is executed by the player, it is possible to make the player have an impression as if the effect mode and the specific effect during the execution of the privilege game are a series of effects. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

<Characteristic C group> (It is difficult to determine from the action of the attacker whether or not a hold sequence occurs.)
A privilege entry means for giving a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball, a first position at which the game ball can enter the benefit entry means, and a game more than the first position Based on the variable means for changing the ball to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, the judging means for executing the judgment based on the establishment of the judging condition, and the first judging result by the judgment by the judging means. Based on the first variable control means for controlling the variable means to change in the first variable manner and the second determination result different from the first determination result by the determination by the determination means. Then, based on the game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination is executed, and the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, a specific number of times All the discrimination by the discriminating means is the first The variable means is controlled to be variable in a second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode of the specific number of times that is executed when the determination result is A second variable control means, and a gaming machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the privilege entering means gives a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, and the first position at which the game ball can enter the privilege entering means, and The variable means changes to the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and based on that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result, the first variable control means is configured to change the variable means in the first variable manner. Controlled by. Based on the determination result of the determination means being the second determination result, it is distinguished from the specific variable first variable mode which is executed when the determination of the specific number of determination means is all the first determination result. In the second variable mode, which includes at least the specific variable mode that makes the appearance difficult, the second variable control means controls the variable means to be variable.

  As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the result is the first determination result or the second determination result from the variable aspect of the variable means. This has the effect of making it difficult for a person to distinguish.

  In the gaming machine C1, the game state setting means can set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state which is disadvantageous to the first game state. In the case where the determination result by the determination means results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second game state is set higher than the ratio of setting the first game state. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state. When the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

  As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, the disadvantageous second game state is likely to be set, so that there is an effect that the game can be played in the expectation that the first determination result will be obtained.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the rate of the first determination result by the determination by the determining means is set higher than the rate of other determination results.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the rate of the first determination result by the determination by the determination means is set higher than the rate of the other determination results. There is a high possibility that the first determination result will be obtained continuously over the number of times. Therefore, even when the second determination result is obtained and the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, it is possible to think that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not different game states are set.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the determination means executes the determination when one of the first determination condition and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. , The game state setting means sets a high rate of setting the first game state when the second determination result is obtained based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition is set. A game machine characterized in that, when the result of the determination based on the establishment is the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second game state, which is disadvantageous to the first game state, is set to be higher. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following advantages are produced. That is, when one of the first determination condition and the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit performs the determination. When the determination result based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the rate at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means is set to be high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the rate of setting the second game state, which is more disadvantageous than the first game state, is set to be high.

  As a result, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first game state having a higher advantage degree than the second game state is likely to be set. A game can be played with the expectation that it will be established. Therefore, when the determination is performed by the determination means, it is possible to draw attention to the type of the determination condition that triggered the determination.

  In the gaming machine C4, the result of the determination is the second determination result, and when the game state setting device sets the first game state, the privilege entering device is set to be more than the second variable mode. A game machine C5, characterized by comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to change in a third variable mode in which a game ball can easily enter.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, a second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the second variable mode is set. Since the third variable control means controls the variable means to change in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the privilege entering means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. When the result is obtained, the degree of advantage can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that the first determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first ball entering means arranged at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction is easy to enter, and the game ball fired in the second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entrance means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball; and the first determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance means, The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the privilege ball entering means inserts a game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are produced. That is, while the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the first direction can easily enter, the second ball can be located at a position where the game ball shot in the second direction can easily enter. A ball entry means and a bonus ball entry means are provided. The first judgment condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, whereas the second judgment condition is based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Is established.

  With this, when the privilege entry means is changed to the first position and the game is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit, the game balls enter the second entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is likely to be performed after the privilege entry means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine C6, a discrimination information acquiring unit that acquires the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering unit, and the discrimination information acquiring unit. A gaming machine C7, further comprising: a discriminant information storage unit capable of storing at least the discriminant information up to a predetermined number of information until the discriminant by the discriminating unit is executed.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6. That is, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is With the predetermined number of information as the upper limit, at least the discrimination information storage means stores the information until the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

  Thereby, when the ball entering the second ball entering means is detected in a situation where the identification by the identifying means cannot be started, the identification information storage means can store the identification information used for the identification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entering means from being wasted.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination executed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is executed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is more than the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. Is also executed with priority, so that when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is performed, the result of the determination can be focused.

<Characteristic D group> (Structure of starting special prize 2 is likely to occur during a big hit, and difficult to occur during normal times)
First determining means for performing determination based on satisfaction of a first determining condition, second determining means for performing determination based on satisfaction of a second determining condition different from the first determining condition, and the first determining means Means, or a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result by the determination by the second determining means, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. As a type, a type determination that determines the type of one privilege game from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game Means, and the first determination means or the second determination means, based on the result of a specific determination, a first state in which the second determination condition is easily established is set, the bonus game of End condition is A state setting unit that sets a second state in which the second determination condition is difficult to be satisfied as compared with the first state, based on the fact that the first state is established, the type determination unit is configured to operate by the second determination unit. The determination result of the second privilege game is higher when the determination result of the first determination unit is the specific determination result than in the determination result of the specific determination result. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the discrimination is executed by the first discriminating means based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and the discrimination is executed by the second discriminating means based on the establishment of the second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. To be done. The bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the score game executing means based on the result of the specific judgment by the judgment by the first judging means or the second judging means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The determining unit determines the type of one privilege game. The state setting means sets the first state in which the second determination condition is easily established based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. On the other hand, the state setting means sets the second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first state, based on the satisfaction condition of the privilege game being satisfied. The type determining unit is configured such that the rate of determining the second privilege game is higher when the specific determination result is determined by the first determining unit than the specific determination result is determined by the second determining unit. It is configured.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in a state other than during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the opportunity to execute the first privilege game having a low advantage degree.

  In the gaming machine D1, the discrimination information acquisition unit that acquires the discrimination information to be used for the discrimination by the second discrimination unit based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit. The gaming machine D2 is characterized by further comprising: discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

  Accordingly, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination means is performed, the plurality of pieces of determination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the plurality of times of the second determination conditions. Is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine D2, the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during execution of the privilege game, and based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, after the privilege game is finished. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that it executes a discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the privilege is provided by the second determining means based on the identifying information acquired by the determining information acquiring means during the execution of the privilege game and stored in the determining information storage means. Since the discrimination is executed after the end of the game, the opportunities for the discrimination to be executed by the second discriminating means can be concentrated after the end of the privilege game. Therefore, after the bonus game is finished, the game can be played in the expectation that the determination by the second determination means does not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position where the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means. , A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball can enter more easily than the first position, and the variable means is changed from the first position to the first position based on the fact that a specific determination condition is satisfied. The variable means changes to the second position on the basis of the specific determination means for determining whether to change the position to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. Variable control means for controlling the variable control means so that the variable control means is in the second state, the specific determination means in the second state, as compared with a case in which the specific determination means determines to change the variable means. The variable means can be changed by Gaming machine D4 which is better when it is determined that the cause, wherein said varying means is used to control such a period for varying longer in the second position.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered, the first position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entering means where the second determination condition is satisfied, and the game ball becomes easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the satisfaction of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether to change the variable unit from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to change to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The variable means is moved to the second position when it is determined that the variable means is changed by the specific determination means in the second state than in the second state when it is determined by the specific determination means. The variable control means controls the variable period to be long.

  As a result, the first state can make it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entering means than the second state. Therefore, in the first state, the second determination condition can be more easily established than in the second state.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position where the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means. , A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball can enter more easily than the first position, and the variable means is changed from the first position to the first position based on the fact that a specific determination condition is satisfied. The variable means changes to the second position on the basis of the specific determination means for determining whether to change the position to two positions and the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. In the first state rather than in the second state, the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is likely to be shorter. A gaming machine D5 characterized by the above.

  According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effect is produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered, the first position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entering means where the second determination condition is satisfied, and the game ball becomes easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is changed to the second position. Based on the satisfaction of the specific determination condition, the specific determination unit determines whether to change the variable unit from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to change to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means to change from the first position to the second position. The first state is configured so that the period from the start of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means to the end thereof is likely to be shorter than that of the second state.

  As a result, in the first state, the period required for the specific determination means to perform the same number of determinations becomes shorter than that in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the opportunity to change the changing means to the second position more times, and thus it is possible to easily enter the game ball in the first state.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it is difficult for a game ball to flow down the specific flow path, and a ball entering means that is provided in a specific flow path and satisfies the second determination condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered. The opening and closing means that can be changed between the closed state in which the game ball is closed and the open state in which the game ball can flow down, and the opening and closing means are set to the open state based on the fact that the first state has been reached. A gaming machine D6, comprising: an opening / closing control means for setting the closed state based on the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball is provided in the specific flow path. The opening / closing means is varied between a closed state in which the game ball is closed so that the game ball cannot flow down easily and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening / closing means is set to the open state by the opening / closing control means on the basis of having entered the first state, while the opening / closing means is set to the closed state on the basis of having entered the second state. .

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

  In the gaming machine D6, the opening / closing means is configured to be able to hold a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening / closing means when the closed state is set. Machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, when the opening / closing means is set to the closed state, a certain number of game balls can be parked on the upstream side of the opening / closing means. Therefore, when it is set to the open state, the stopped game ball can be entered into the entering means. Therefore, in the first state where the open state is set, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established.

<Feature E group> (The main-to-sub variation pattern command includes information according to the number of remaining variations until the end of the specific effect)
In a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a main control means for performing main control regarding a game, and a sub-control means for performing control regarding a game based on a command output from the main control means. The main control means executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. Benefit game executing means, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and dynamic display execution operation of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. The dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time, the information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and the information corresponding to the dynamic display time are different. Command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least specific information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means outputs the dynamic display time output by the command output means. Command receiving means for receiving a command, dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and a predetermined specifying condition Based on the fact that the above condition is established, a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect that can be executed over one or a plurality of the dynamic display times on the display unit, and the specification included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect, and the specific effect end determination means for the specific effect. By the fact that it is determined to end, until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the judgment ends, A game machine E1 comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, which is advantageous to the player. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed by the dynamic display executing means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is output by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and the dynamic display time command is dynamically changed based on the dynamic display time command received by the command receiving means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or a plurality of dynamic display times is executed by the specific effect executing means on the display means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the specific effect end determination means determines whether or not to end the specific effect. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means ends based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination when the specific effect end determination means determines that the specific effect is ended. By the time it is done, the specific effect is finished by the specific effect main hot water amount means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect can be appropriately ended.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the specific effect end determination means determines to end the specific effect, the identification is performed based on information included in the dynamic display time command according to the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the gaming machine E2 is provided with a production mode determining unit that determines a production mode until the specific production is finished by the production ending unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, when the specific effect termination determining means determines to end the specific effect, the determination result included in the dynamic display time command is determined by the determining means. Based on the information, the effect mode until the specific effect is completed by the specific effect ending unit is determined by the effect mode determining unit, so that the effect mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determining unit. . Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation mode of the specific presentation can be appropriately set.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the slave control means is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on determination means determines power-on to the game machine and when the power-on determination means determines power-on. Based on the specified information, the cutoff time determining means for determining whether or not the time when the power of the gaming machine was turned off was the execution of the specific effect, and the execution time of the specific effect by the cutoff time determining means. An amusement machine E3, characterized in that the gaming machine E3 is provided with post-insertion effect executing means for executing the specific effect on the basis that it is determined to be in the middle.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the sub-control means determines whether the power to the gaming machine is turned on by the power-on determination means, and the power-on determination means determines that the power is turned on. In addition, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, it is determined by the cutoff time determining means whether or not the time when the power of the game machine was turned off was the execution of the specific effect. The specific effect is executed by the after-production effect executing means, based on the determination made by the shutoff time determining means that the specific effect is being executed.

  As a result, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect can be restarted, so that it is possible to prevent the effect mode from being different before and after the power is turned off, and to prevent the player from being confused. The effect is that you can.

  In the gaming machine E3, the specific effect ending means ends the specific effect executed by the post-insertion effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the specific effect executed by the post-input effect executing means is ended by the specific effect ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned on during execution of the specific effect. Even if it is cut off, there is an effect that the specific effect can be appropriately ended.

  In the gaming machine E4, the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as an effect period of the specific effect, the gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, a specific period predetermined by the specific effect executing means is set as the effect period of the specific effect, so a simple process is performed when setting the specific effect. The effect is that it can be set with.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the main control means obtains the discrimination information acquisition means for obtaining the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquisition means. The discriminant information storage means is capable of storing at least the determined discriminant information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discriminating by the discriminant means, and the command output means is stored in the discriminant information storage means. The information number command including information according to the information number of the discrimination information is output to the sub-control unit, and the specific effect execution unit, the specific information execution unit of the discrimination information included in the information number command. The gaming machine E6, characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of information.

  The gaming machine E6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit is stored in at least the discrimination information storage unit with the predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for the discrimination by the discrimination unit. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information that is less than or equal to the number of pieces of information of the determination information included in the information number command.

  With this, the specific effect can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage unit or less, so that the identification information can be specified even though the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed. This has the effect of suppressing the continuation of the production.

  In the gaming machine E6, the information according to the number of pieces of the discrimination information is from the time when the specific condition is satisfied to the time when all the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. The gaming machine E7, which is configured by information according to the number of remaining pieces of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E6, information according to the number of pieces of discrimination information is all discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied. Until the end, it is composed of information according to the number of remaining pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that the specific effect is stored in the discrimination information storage means more reliably. There is an effect that it can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of discrimination information or less.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, and E1 to E7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, and E1 to E7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there are known game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays the symbols in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that the jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainments are executed to improve the entertainment of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, further interest is required.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is a player based on the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the specific determination result by the determination by the determination means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to, and a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is a first game state, and for a player more than the first game state A game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state having a high advantage degree, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means. Display execution means and a period until the privilege game is ended based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the privilege game, and is executed after the privilege game is ended. Or, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a period until the dynamic display of a plurality of the identification information ends, and the specific effect, the game state after the specific effect is finished is the first 2 This is an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not it is in the gaming state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the specific effect execution means is set when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state. The specific effect is executed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, discrimination information acquisition means for obtaining discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on a predetermined specific trigger. The discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring unit, the discriminating information storing unit capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, and the specific condition are satisfied until the discriminating condition for the acquired discriminating information is satisfied. Based on what has been done, the determination means for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result, and the determination means And a production mode determined by the production mode determination means, wherein the specific production execution means determines the production mode of the specific production based on a determination result. It is intended to perform a specific effect.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, wherein the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means is a game state after the execution is completed by the game state setting means. From a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a first privilege game set to the first game state and a second privilege game whose game state after execution is set to the second game state 1 is provided with a type determining unit for determining the type, and the determining unit determines whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage unit includes the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game. Based on the determination that the determination means determines that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, the game after the completion of the specific effect is determined. Status Is to determine the suggestive representation embodiment said first is a gaming state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, in which the specific effect is set as the effect period with a predetermined specific period irrespective of the effect mode. It is a thing.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the special advantage is given to the player based on that the discrimination by the discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result. The game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as the game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed. The game state of 1 is set from the state by the game state setting means. The identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Dynamic display of a period until the privilege game ends based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the privilege game, and one or more identification information executed after the privilege game ends. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the period until the end. The specific effect is composed of an effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is the second game state.
As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the second gaming state, the specification is made. Since the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the condition being satisfied, unless a specific determination result is obtained during the execution of the specific effect and the game state shifts to the first game state, the second game in the specific effect. A condition is suggested. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played while expecting that a specific determination result will not be obtained during execution of the specific effect.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discriminating means is acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means on the basis of a predetermined specific trigger, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means is discriminated from the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the predetermined number of pieces of information is stored in the discriminant information storage means with the upper limit. Based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the determination means determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. The effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determination means based on the determination result of the determination means. The specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.
With this, the determination result by the determining unit can be determined in advance, so that there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode in accordance with the result of the determination actually performed by the determining unit.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and after the execution is completed One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. The determination means determines whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game. Based on the determination means determining that the determination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a production mode that suggests that the game state after the specific production is the first game state is produced. It is determined by the mode determining means.
As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played in the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, as the effect period of the specific effect, a predetermined specification irrespective of the effect mode is specified. Since the period is set, it is difficult to predict the result of the specific effect from the length of the effect period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
65a Specific prize hole (privilege entry means)
65f1 open / close door (variable means)
112 firing control device (launching means)
203b Second special symbol reservation ball storage area (discrimination information storage means )
S305 determination means
S307, S309 dynamic display period determining means S310 dynamic display hand stage
S406 Discrimination information acquisition means
S1004 Second variable control means
S1005 first variable control means S1110 gaming state setting hand stage

Claims (1)

A privilege entry means for giving a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball,
Variable means for changing between a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege entering means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position,
Discriminating means for discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition;
Discriminating information for use in discriminating the discriminating means, the discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition,
The discriminant information acquired by the discriminant information acquiring unit, the discriminant information storage unit capable of storing until the discriminant information is used for discriminating by the discriminant unit with a predetermined specific number as an upper limit
A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means,
A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means,
Based on that the discrimination result of the discriminating means has become a predetermined first discriminating result, the discriminating means performs the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the first discriminating result. First variable control means for controlling the variable mode of the variable means until the new determination becomes executable to be the first variable mode,
Based on that the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result different from the first determination result, the game state at the time when the determination corresponding to the second determination result is executed is different. A game state setting means capable of setting a game state,
Based on that the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, the variable means is set to a second variable aspect including at least a specific variable aspect that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable aspect. Second variable control means for controlling,
In a situation where the discrimination information corresponding to the specific number of the first discrimination results is stored in the discrimination information storage means, it corresponds to the first discrimination information of the specific number of the discrimination information. The variable mode of the variable means from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the determination result corresponding to the final determination information among the specific number of determination information, Means for making the appearance indistinguishable from a part of the second variable aspect ,
When the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means, an effect capable of suggesting to the player a possibility that the discrimination result using the stored discrimination information will be the first discrimination result, A gaming machine, characterized in that it can be executed before the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means .